911 Carrera

Owner’s Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Dear Owner,

We would like to thank you for your the more pleasure you will experience group of vehicles, it may order a recall
purchase of a Porsche Sports car. driving your new car. Always keep your and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
Judging by the car you have chosen, Owner’s Manual in the car, and give it cannot become involved in individual
you are a motorist of a special breed, to the new owner if you ever sell your problems between you and your dealer,
and you are probably no novice when it Porsche. or Porsche Cars N.A..
comes to automobiles. A separate Maintenance Booklet To contact NHTSA, you may call
Remember however, as with any vehicle, explains how you can keep your Porsche the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free
you should take time to familiarize in top driving condition by having at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY:
yourself with your Porsche and its it serviced regularly. A separate 1–800–424–9153); go to
performance characteristics. Always Warranty and Customer Information http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
drive within your own unique capabilities Booklet contains detailed information Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
as a driver and your level of experience about the warranties covering your Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
with your Porsche. Ensure that anyone Porsche. You can also obtain other informa-
else driving your Porsche does the tion about motor vehicle safety from
For U.S. only: http://www.safercar.gov.
same. To prevent or minimize injury,
always use your safety belts. Never If you believe that your vehicle has a fault Your car has thousands of parts and
consume alcohol or drugs before or which could cause a crash, injury or components which have been designed
during the operation of your vehicle. death, you should immediately inform and manufactured in accordance with
the National Highway Traffic Safety Porsche’s high standards of engineering
This Owner’s Manual contains a host Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
of useful information. Please take the quality and safety.
notifying Porsche Cars North America,
time to read this manual before you drive Inc. (Porsche Cars N.A.). Any alteration of the vehicle may
your new Porsche. Become familiar with negate or interfere with those
the operation of your Porsche car for If NHTSA receives similar complaints, safety features built into the vehicle.
maximum safety and operating pleasure. it may open an investigation, and if it Modications may be carried out
The better you know your Porsche, finds that a safety problem exists in a

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 on your vehicle only if approved by Regularly check your vehicle for right to make changes in design and
Porsche. signs of damage. Damaged or specification, and to make additions
Your Porsche is intended to be used in missing aerodynamic components or improvements in its product without
a safe manner obeying the local laws such as spoilers or underside pan- incurring any obligation to install them on
and in the light of driving conditions els affect the driving behavior and products previously manufactured.
faced by you, and in accordance with therefore must be replaced immedi- We wish you many miles of safe and
the instructions provided in this Owner’s ately. pleasurable driving in your Porsche.
Manual. Your car may have all or some of the
Do not misuse your Porsche by components described in this manual. Warning!
ignoring those laws and driving con- Should you have difficulty understanding
any of the explanations of features or For your own protection and longer
ditions, or by ignoring the instruc-
equipment installed in your vehicle, service life of your car, please
tions in this manual. Any alteration
contact your authorized Porsche dealer. follow all operating instructions and
or misuse of the vehicle can lead to
He/She will be glad to assist you. Also special warnings. These special
accidents and severe or fatal person
check with your dealer on other available warnings use the safety alert symbol,
al injuries.
options or equipment. followed by the words Danger,
The fitting of racing tires (e.g. slicks) Warning and Caution. These
for sporting events is not approved by Throughout this booklet, left is designat-
special warnings contain important
Porsche. Very high cornering speeds ed as the driver’s side of the vehicle, and
messages regarding your safety
can be achieved with racing tires. right as the passenger’s side of the vehi-
and/or the potential for damage
However, the resulting transverse cle.
to your Porsche. Ignoring them
acceleration values would jeopardize Text, illustrations and specifications in could result in serious mechanical
the adequate supply of oil to the engine. this manual are based on the information failure,serious personal injury or
Porsche therefore will not accept available at the time of printing. death.
any warranty or accept any liability It has always been Porsche’s policy
for damage occurring as a result of to continuously improve its products.
non-compliance with this provision. Porsche, therefore, reserves the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do not alter your Porsche. Any alter-
ation could create dangerous con-
ditions or defeat safety engineering
features built into your car.
Do not misuse your Porsche. Use it
safely, and consistently with the law,
according to the driving conditions,
and the instructions in this manual.
Alteration or misuse of your Porsche
could cause accidents and severe or
fatal personal injuries.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Imprint
WKD 997 021 07

6/06 Note to owners

© Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG In Canada, this manual is also available in French.
To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to:
Porsche, the Porsche crest, 911, Carrera, Targa,
PCCB, Tiptronic and Tequipment are registered
trademarks and the distinctive shapes of Porsche
Note aux proprietaires
automobiles are trademarks of Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG. ce Manuel en franfais auprgs du concessionaire ou
du:
All rights reserved.
Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd.
Printed in Germany
Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE
32654
5045 Orbitor Drive
Building #8, Suite 200
Mississauga, Ontario
Canada L4W 4Y4
Telephone number for customer assistance:
1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuel Quality
Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using unleaded premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON
(93 CLC or AKI). Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available. Be assured that your vehicle will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane
numbers of at least 95 RON (90 CLC or AKI), since the engine’s ”Electronic OctaneTM knock control“ will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.

Fuels containing alcohol and ether

Some areas of the U.S. require oxygenated fuels during certain portions of the year. Oxygenated fuels are fuels which contain alcohols (such as methanol or etha-
nol) or ether (such as MTBE).
Under normal conditions, the amount of these compounds in the fuel will not affect driveability.
You may use oxygenated fuels in your Porsche, provided the octane requirements for your vehicle are met. We recommend, however, that you change to a differ-
ent fuel or station if any of the following problems occur with your vehicle:
– Deterioration of driveability and performance.
– Substantially reduced fuel economy.
– Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially at high altitude or at high temperature.
– Engine malfunction or stalling.

Fuels containing MMT

Some North American fuels contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your emis-
sion control system performance may be negatively affected. The check engine warning lights on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, Porsche
recommends you stop using fuels containing MMT.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Porsche and the Environment

Environmental guidelines California Proposition 65 Warning Environmentally friendly vehicles

We develop and produce exclusive sports cars with Modern environmental technology ensures
Warning!
advanced environmental and safety technology compliance with all emission laws applicable
and a great ability to fascinate. worldwide.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit
Our environmental policy is based on the These have the following advantages:
chemicals known to the State of California
following principles: to cause cancer and birth defects or other – Rapid operational readiness of the catalytic
– The maximum possible use of environmental reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids converters ensures low emissions, even in
and safety technology that is economically contained in vehicles and certain products of short-trip operation.
justifiable. component wear contain or emit chemicals – Reliable operation and good emission control
known to the State of California to cause over a long useful life.
– Economical usage of energy and resources.
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
– Involvement of our business partners and harm. Please observe the chapter ”FUEL ECONOMY”
contractors in our efforts to protect the on page 242.
environment.
– Open dialogue with all social groups. Production
Whether in production or repair, Porsche always
relies on environmentally friendly technology. An
example of this is the water-based paint used in our
painting installations. Water-base paints and new
painting methods reduce solvent emissions by 70
per cent. The water used in the painting installation
is re-circulated. Waste water leaves the Porsche
factory only after being appropriately treated.
A waste-management system has been introduced
to reduce the amount of waste while simultaneous-
ly increasing the recycling rate.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Recycling - for a Porsche, this is virtually Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS
an academic question ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE
ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143.
More than two-thirds of all Porsches ever built are
still running.

Just in case recycling is ever necessary, we

take the following precautionary measures:
– Identification of all materials.
– Use of recyclable materials.
– Reusable components designed for simple
removal.
– These reasons result in a further increase in
the recycling rate which is currently 80 per
cent.

Emission control is built in

Innovative engine technology combines high
engine performance and environmental compatibil-
ity.
The engine diagnosis system electronically
monitors the components and systems that affect
exhaust gases.
This continuous monitoring and fault storage ena-
bles swift, reliable diagnosis and fault detection.
Any fault messages are indicated to the driver by
the ”Check Engine“ warning light and the on-board
computer.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 General safety instructions

Sport tires – The driver’s skill level must be commensurate

Danger!
with the vehicle performance levels in the
Sport tires (ultra high performance tires) are
upper range limits, due to increased safety Risk of accident from worn tires due to
approved for use on public highways and comply
risks in the upper range limits. accelerated rate of tire wear. Because these
with all statutory requirements and safety criteria.
high-performance sport tires wear faster than
At oudside temperatures below 45°F (7°C )
The design of the tire is also geared towards use most summer tires, it is important to check
change to winter tires.
on racing circuits (driver safety training courses, tire wear frequently to avoid risk of serious
sports driving schools, Club Sport events) and Notify anyone using your car of these charac- personal injury or death from worn tires.
provides distinct advantages here in terms of dry teristics and possible effects.
grip and wear compared to conventional road tires. Check tire wear frequently.

The major features are a reduced tread depth and a Danger!

special tread pattern and carcass. Risk of accident through loss of road surface
The design features of this sports tire result contact, control over the vehicle and breaking Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake
in the following effects compared with other ability, leading to serious personal injury or (PCCB)
summer tires when used under normal driving death. The reduced tire tread depth means Please observe the chapter ”BRAKES” on page
conditions: that there is an increased risk of aquaplaning 72.
on wet roads.
– Because these tires have different tread The high-performance brake system is designed
characteristics, they will wear considerably When driving on wet or mud-covered roads for optimal braking effect at all speeds and
faster than other summer tires. How much reduce speed significantly. temperatures. Certain speeds, braking forces
faster they will wear depends on individual and ambient conditions (such as temperature and
driving style and service conditions. humidity) therefore might cause brake noises.
– Exercise caution when driving on wet roads, Wear on the different components and braking
paying special attention to hydroplaning system, such as brake pads and brake discs,
situations (stagnant water, puddles, lane depends to a great extent on the individual driving
grooves). Sport tires have a lower tread depth style and the conditions of use and therefore
than normal tires and you must therefore cannot be expressed in actual miles on the road.
adapt speed accordingly when driving on wet
surfaces. The values communicated by Porsche are based
on normal operation adapted to traffic. Wear
increases considerably when the vehicle is driven

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 on race tracks or through an aggressive driving Portable fuel containers Ground clearance
style.
Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer Danger! Caution!
about the current guidelines in effect before Portable fuel containers may leak, whether Risk of damage. The vehicle may touch
such use of your vehicle. they are full or partially empty. Fuel leaking the ground as a result of reduced ground
from a portable container carried in your clearance.
Setting and operating vehicle components vehicle could, in case of an accident, cause a
Drive carefully and slowly on steep slopes
when driving re or explosion, resulting in serious personal
(e.g. parking lots, curbs, uneven roads, lifting
injury or death.
platforms, etc.).
Warning! Never carry additional fuel in portable contain-
Avoid steep ramps.
There is a danger of accident if you set or ers in your vehicle.
operate the on-board computer, radio,
navigation system, telephone or other
equipment while driving. This could distract
Engine exhaust
you from the trafc and cause you to lose
control of the vehicle resulting in serious
personal injury or death. Danger!

Operate the components while driving only if Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled.
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. Engine exhaust fumes have many compo-
nents which you can smell. They also contain
Carry out any complicated operating or setting carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
procedures only with the vehicle stationary. and odorless gas. Carbon monoxide can
cause unconsciousness and even death if
inhaled.
Never start or let the engine run in an
enclosed, unventilated area. It is not rec-
ommended to sit in your car for prolonged
periods with the engine on and the car not
moving.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Controls, Instruments 14 - 189
Shifting Gears 191 - 198
Mobile Roofs 199 - 229
Maintenance, Car Care 231 - 264
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 265 - 323
Vehicle Identication, Technical Data 325 - 347
Index 348 - 353

11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Controls, Instruments
Dear Porsche Owner ...................................... 15 Four-Wheel Drive ........................................... 66 Check Engine Warning Light ......................... 107
Before driving off... ........................................ 16 Retractable Rear Spoiler ................................ 68 Central warning light .................................... 108
In the driver’s seat... ...................................... 17 Clutch Pedal ................................................. 70 Brake Warning Light ..................................... 109
On the road... ................................................ 18 Parking Brake ............................................... 71 On-Board Computer (BC) .............................. 110
Break in hints for the first 2000 miles/3000 Brakes ......................................................... 72 LIMIT Acoustic warning signal for speed limit .. 113
kilometers .................................................... 19 ABS Brake System ........................................ 75 INFO Warning messages .............................. 116
Never invite car theft! ..................................... 21 Sports Exhaust System .................................. 77 TEL Telephone information ........................... 117
Keys ............................................................ 22 Sport Mode .................................................. 78 CHRONO Stopwatch .................................... 120
Key with Radio Remote Control ....................... 23 Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ............... 79 TPC Tire Pressure Monitoring ....................... 127
Doors .......................................................... 25 Porsche Active Suspension Management OIL Display and measurement of the engine oil
Central Locking ............................................. 26 (PASM) ......................................................... 82 level ........................................................... 136
Alarm System, Passenger Compartment Monitor- Interior Lights ............................................... 83 SET Basic setting on on-board computer ........ 139
ing ............................................................... 30 Operation, Instruments .................................. 84 General information regarding the on-board
Power Windows ............................................ 32 Ignition/Starter Switch with anti-theft Steering computer functions ..................................... 142
Mirrors ......................................................... 34 Lock ............................................................ 86 Warnings on the instrument panel and the on-board
Rear window defogger, door mirror heating ...... 36 Starting and Stopping Engine .......................... 89 computer ................................................... 143
Seat Adjustment ............................................ 38 Instrument Panel USA Models ......................... 91 Emergency Flasher Switch ........................... 153
Seat Memory ................................................ 41 Instrument Panel Canada Models .................... 93 Light Switch ................................................ 154
Heated Seats ................................................ 43 Engine oil temperature ................................... 95 Welcome Home Lighting .............................. 154
Rear Seat Backrests ...................................... 44 Automatic Speed Control Indicator light ........... 96 Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment .......... 155
Steering Wheel Adjustment ............................. 45 Instrument Illumination ................................... 97 Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /Parking light /
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel ....................... 46 Trip Odometer .............................................. 98 Flasher Lever .............................................. 156
Sun Visors .................................................... 47 Speedometer ............................................... 99 Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever .................. 157
Safety Belts .................................................. 48 Tachometer ................................................ 100 Automatic Speed Control ............................. 160
Airbag Systems ............................................ 51 Cooling System ........................................... 101 Automatic Air Conditioning System ................ 163
Child Restraint Systems ................................. 57 Tiptronic .................................................... 102 Central and Side Vents ................................. 166
LATCH System .............................................. 61 Fuel ........................................................... 103 Fresh-air intake ........................................... 166
Child Restraint Anchorages ............................ 62 Clock ......................................................... 104 Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating ...... 167
Rollover Protection System ............................ 63 Engine Oil Pressure ..................................... 105 Ashtray ...................................................... 168
Parking Aids ................................................. 64 Battery ....................................................... 106 Cigarette Lighter ......................................... 169

Controls, Instruments 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cupholder .................................................. 170
Storage in the Passenger Compartment ........ 172
Luggage Compartment Lid and Engine Compart-
ment Lid ..................................................... 175
Luggage Compartment (Vehicles without Four-
Wheel Drive) ............................................... 177
Luggage Compartment (Vehicles with Four-Wheel
Drive) ......................................................... 179
Trunk Entrapment ........................................ 180
Fire Extinguisher ......................................... 181
HomeLink ................................................... 182
Porsche Communication Management (PCM) . 185
Car Audio Operation/Tips ............................. 186
Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms .......... 188

14 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dear Porsche Owner
A lot has gone into the manufacture of your
Porsche, including advanced engineering, rigid
quality control and demanding inspections. These
engineering and safety features will be enhanced
by you...

the safe driver...

– who knows his/her car and all controls,
– who maintains the vehicle properly,
– who uses driving skills wisely and always
drives within her/his own capabilities and
the level of familiarity with the vehicle.
You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to
perform most of the checks listed on the following
pages. If in doubt, have these checks performed
by your authorized Porsche dealer.

Controls, Instruments 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Before driving off... If a child will be riding in the vehicle, check child
seat/child seat restraint system to ensure that
Check the following items rst restraints are properly adjusted.
Turn the engine off before you attempt any Check all exterior and interior lights for
checks or repairs on the vehicle. operation and that the lenses are clean.
Be sure the tires are inflated correctly. Check Check the headlights for proper aim, and if
tires for damage and tire wear. necessary, have them adjusted.
See that wheel bolts are properly tightened Check under the vehicle for leaks.
and not loose or missing. Be sure all luggage is stowed securely.
Check engine oil level, add if necessary. Make
it a habit to have engine oil checked with every Emergency equipment
refueling.
It is good practice to carry emergency equipment
Check all fluid levels such as windshield in your vehicle. Some of the items you should have
washer and brake fluid levels. are: window scraper, snow brush, container or
bag of sand or salt, emergency light, small shovel,
Be sure the vehicle battery is well charged and
first-aid kit, etc.
cranks the engine properly.
Check all doors and lids for proper operation
and latch them properly.
Check, and if necessary replace worn or
cracked wiper blades.
See that all windows are clear and unobstruct-
ed.
Check air intake slots and area between
luggage compartment lid and windshield.
Ensure that these areas are free of snow and
ice, so the heater and the windshield wipers
work properly.

16 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In the driver’s seat...
Check operation of the horn.
Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals
and controls. To reduce the possibility of
injury from the airbag deployment, you should
always sit back as far from the steering wheel
as is practical, while still maintaining full
vehicle control.
Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
Buckle your safety belts.
Check operation of the foot and parking brake.
Check all warning and indicator lights with
ignition on and engine not running.
Start engine and check all warning displays for
warning symbols.
Never leave an idling car unattended.
Lock doors from inside, especially with
children in the car to prevent inadvertent
opening of doors from inside or outside. Drive
with doors locked.

Controls, Instruments 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 On the road... When parked, always set the parking brake.
Move the Tiptronic selector lever to ”P“ or the
Never drive after you have consumed alcohol gearshift lever to reverse or first gear. On hills
or drugs. also turn the front wheels toward the curb.
Always have your safety belt fastened. When emergency repairs become necessary,
Always drive defensively. Expect the unexpect- move the vehicle well off the road. Turn on
ed. the emergency flasher and use other warning
devices to alert other motorists. Do not park
Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes. or operate the vehicle in areas where the hot
Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving exhaust system may come in contact with dry
conditions warrant it. grass, brush, spilled fuel or other flammable
material.
Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle
in front of you, depending on traffic, road and Make it a habit to have the engine oil checked
weather conditions. after every refueling.
Reduce speed at night and during inclement
weather. Driving in wet weather requires
caution and reduced speeds, particularly
on roads with standing water, as the handling
characteristics of the vehicle may be impaired
due to hydroplaning of the tires.
Always observe speed limits and obey road
signs and traffic laws.
When tired, get well off the road, stop and take
a rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the
vehicle with engine idling.
Please observe the chapter ”ENGINE
EXHAUST” on page 9.

18 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Break in hints for the rst 2000 There may be a slight stiffness in the steering, conditions, as well as the amount of dilution and
gear-shifting or other controls during the break-in oxidation of the lubricant.
miles/3000 kilometers period which will gradually disappear.
Make a habit of checking engine oil with every
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining refueling, add if necessary.
optimum performance from your new Porsche. Break in brake pads and brake discs
Despite the most modern, high-precision manufac- New brake pads and discs have to be “broken in”,
turing methods, the moving parts must still wear and therefore only attain optimal friction when
in with each other. This wearing-in occurs mainly in the car has covered several hundred miles or
the first 2000 miles/3000 km. km. The slightly reduced braking ability must be
compensated for by pressing the brake pedal
Therefore: harder. This also applies whenever the brake pads
and brake discs are replaced.
Preferably take longer trips.
Avoid frequent cold starts with short-distance New tires
driving whenever possible. New tires do not have maximum traction. They
Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops. tend to be slippery.
Do not exceed maximum engine speed of Break in new tires by driving at moderate
4200 rpm (revolutions per minute). speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles/100
to 200 km. Longer braking distances must be
Do not run a cold engine at high rpm either in
anticipated.
Neutral or in gear.
Do not let the engine labor, especially when Engine oil and fuel consumption
driving uphill. Shift to the next lower gear in
During the break-in period oil and fuel consumption
time (use the most favorable rpm range).
may be higher than normal.
Never lug the engine in high gear at low
Please observe the chapter ”TECHNICAL
speeds. This rule applies at all times, not just
DATA” on page 328.
during the break-in period.
As always, the rate of oil consumption depends
Do not participate in motor racing events,
on the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at
sports driving schools, etc. during the first
which the engine is operated, the climate and road
2000 miles/3000 kilometers.

Controls, Instruments 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 Inner door handle
2 Power windows
3 Door mirror control
4 Light switch
5 Ignition/starter switch with steering lock
6 Turn signal/headlight dimmer, asher lever
7 Operating lever for on-board computer
8 Horn
9 Emergency asher switch, central locking
switch
10 Switches for rear spoiler, Porsche Active
Suspension Management (PASM), Sport mode,
Porsche Stability Management (PSM), Sports
exhaust system
11 Cupholder
12 Switch for seat memory
13 Diagnostic socket (OBD)
14 Lid release
15 Seat height adjustment
16 Steering-wheel adjustment
17 Backrest angle adjustment
18 Seat fore and aft adjustment

20 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Never invite car theft! Remove valuables (e.g. car documents,
Warning! telephone, house keys) from the car.
An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock Risk of a serious accident. The steering Lock doors.
invites car theft. column will lock when you remove the key
A steering wheel lock and a gong alarm are while you are driving or as the car is rolling
standard equipment in your Porsche. The gong to a stop. You will not be able to steer the car.
alarm will sound if you open the driver’s door while Serious personal injury or death could result
the key is still in the ignition lock. It is your reminder from loss of control of the vehicle.
to pull the key out of the ignition lock and to lock
Never remove the key from the steering lock
the doors.
while you are driving.

Warning!
Any uncontrolled movement of the vehicle
may result in property damage, serious To protect your vehicle and your
personal injury or death. Never leave your possessions from theft, you should always
vehicle unattended with the key in the ignition proceed as follows when leaving your
lock, especially if children and/or pets are left vehicle:
unattended in the vehicle. They can operate
power windows and other controls. If the Close windows.
engine is left running, they may accidentally Close lifting/sliding roof
engage the shift lever. Serious personal injury
or death could result from loss of control of Close convertible top (with the convertible top
the vehicle. open, the passenger compartment monitoring
system is always switched off)
Always remove the ignition key.
Close the sliding glass roof (Targa) (with
Always set the parking brake. the sliding glass roof open, the passenger
Lock the doors with the remote control. compartment monitoring system is always
switched off)
Remove ignition key.
Engage steering lock.
Lock glove compartment.

Controls, Instruments 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Keys Replacement keys engine started only using an authorized ignition
key.
General information regarding the keys Order of replacement keys
Replacement car keys can be obtained only from
Switching off the immobilizer
Please observe the chapter ”ALARM SYSTEM,
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MONITORING” your authorized Porsche dealer, and this can Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock.
on page 30. sometimes be very time-consuming. You should
If the ignition is left on for more than 2 minutes
therefore always keep the spare key on your
Please observe the chapter ”CENTRAL without the engine being started, the immobilizer is
person. Keep it in a safe place (e.g. wallet), but
LOCKING” on page 26. switched on again.
under no circumstances in or on the vehicle.
Two main keys and one spare key are supplied with If this happens, turn the ignition key to the left
The key codes of new keys have to be “reported”
your Porsche. These keys operate all the locks on before starting the engine. The immobilizer
to the car control unit by your authorized Porsche
your vehicle. is switched off again, and the engine can be
dealer.
started.
Be careful with your car keys: do not part with
A total of 6 car keys can be reported to the control
them except under exceptional circumstanc- Please observe the chapter ”IGNITION/START-
unit.
es. ER SWITCH WITH ANTI-THEFT STEERING
LOCK” on page 86.
To avoid battery run-down, always remove the Disabling key codes
ignition key from the ignition lock.
If a key is lost, the key codes can be disabled by Switching on the immobilizer
an authorized Porsche dealer. All the remaining
Remove ignition key.
car keys are required for this purpose. Disabling
the code ensures that the car can be started only
using authorized keys.
Security wheel bolts
If wheels have to be removed during a work-
Note
shop visit, do not forget to hand over the sock-
Please note that the other locks can still be et for the security wheel bolts along with the
opened with the disabled key. car key.

Immobilizer
There is a transponder (an electronic component)
in the key grip, containing a stored code. When the
ignition is switched on, the ignition lock checks the
code. The immobilizer can be switched off and the

22 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Switching off the alarm system if it is Luggage compartment lid or glass rear
triggered accidentally hatch (Targa)
Unlock the vehicle.
Unlocking
Luggage compartment lid: Press button 2 for
approx. 2 seconds.
Glass rear hatch (Targa): Press button 3 for
approx. 2 seconds.
If the vehicle was locked, it is unlocked simultane-
ously with the luggage compartmentt/rear window
(Targa). In vehicles with seat memory the stored
seat and door mirror positions are automatical-
ly set. The vehicle will be locked again approx.
15 seconds after the luggage compartment/rear
window (Targa) is closed if none of the doors was
opened.
A - Main key
Note
1 - Central locking button
2 - Luggage compartment lid button Your authorized Porsche dealer can program
3 - Button for glass rear hatch (Targa) further types of unlocking for the luggage compart-
4 - Light-emitting diode ment.
B - Spare key
Type 1
Key with Radio Remote Control The relocking time of the doors can be adjusted
to suit your individual requirements: 10 - 100 sec-
Unlocking the vehicle onds.

Press button 1. Type 2

Locking the vehicle The doors stay locked when the luggage compart-
ment/rear window (Targa) is unlocked.
Press button 1.

Controls, Instruments 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The remote-control standby function
switches off after 7 days
If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the
remote control within 7 days, the remote control
standby function is switched off (to prevent
discharging of the vehicle battery).
1. In this case, unlock the driver’s door with the
key at the door lock. Leave the door closed in
order to prevent the alarm system from being
triggered.
2. Press button 1 on the remote control.
The remote control is now activated again and the
alarm system is switched off.
Note
Do not insert the ignition key into the ignition
lock if the vehicle battery is discharged. The
ignition key can no longer be removed.
The key cannot be removed until the vehicle
electrical system is supplied with power again.
Please observe the chapter ”EMERGENCY
UNLOCKING OF THE LUGGAGE COMPART-
MENT LID” on page 294.
Please observe the chapter ”EMERGENCY
STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on page
300.

24 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Door storage tray
Opening storage tray
Open the cover.
Always keep the door storage tray C closed, so
that the side airbag is not obstructed in the event of
an accident.

Doors Opening doors from outside

Unlock vehicle with the remote control.
Automatic lowering of the door windows
Slowly pull door handle A.
If the door windows are closed, they will be
automatically opened by a few millimeters when
Opening unlocked doors from inside
the doors are opened and, when the doors are
closed, they will be closed again. This makes it Slowly pull door handle B.
easier to open and close the doors and protects
the seals. Opening locked doors from inside
Therefore, you should pull the door handle Slowly pull door handle B twice.
slowly so that the door window can be lowered
Please observe the chapter ”LOCKING
before the door is opened. CONDITIONS” on page 26.

Controls, Instruments 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Central Locking Please observe the chapter ”LOAD SWITCH- Automatic relocking
OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on page
If the car is unlocked by remote control and none
General information regarding central 293.
of the car doors is opened within approx. 60
locking Please observe the chapter ”SEAT MEMORY” seconds, automatic relocking takes place. This
This device complies with: on page 41. relocking time can be adapted to your individual
Part 15 of the FCC Rules requirements (10 seconds - 100 seconds) by an
Both car doors and the filler flap can be centrally
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. authorized Porsche dealer.
unlocked or locked with the remote control.
Operation is subject to the following two condi- The vehicle cannot be locked if the driver’s door is Locking conditions
tions: not completely closed.
Lock car once. The doors cannot be opened
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- A short signal from the alarm horn will draw your from the outside. Alarm system and passen-
ence, and attention to the fact that the following components ger compartment monitoring are switched on.
2. this device must accept any interference are not completely closed when you try to lock the
received, including interference that may vehicle: If a person or animal remains in the vehicle:
cause undesired operation. – Passenger’s door Quickly lock car twice. The doors cannot
Note – Luggage compartment lid be opened from the outside. The passenger
compartment monitoring is switched off.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any – Engine compartment lid
radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
– Glass rear hatch (Targa) Unlocking the door with the inner door handle
modifications to this equipment. Such modification
could void the user’s authority to operate the – Glove compartment Any person remaining in the locked car can open
equipment. the door with the inner door handle:
Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the door
lock and opening the door may activate the alarm 1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
Warning! system within 10 seconds. lock.
Note 2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by Porsche could void the user’s On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus, Note
authority to operate this equipment. the PCM can be used to activate automatic door Inform any person remaining in the car that the
locking. Please observe the chapter “Individual alarm system will be triggered if the door is
Memory” in the separate PCM operating instruc- opened.
tions.

26 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Malfunction of the remote control The fault should be remedied immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
The remote control may not function correctly due
to local radio wave interference. The vehicle will
then not lock properly. This can be identified by the Indication by emergency asher and
missing locking sound and the missing check-back alarm horn
signal of the emergency flasher. If the remote control is used for unlocking or
If this should occur: locking, a response is provided by the emergency
flasher:
Lock the vehicle with the key in the door.
– Unlocking - single flash.
Emergency operation - opening – Locking - double flash.
Unlock the driver’s door with the key at the – Locking twice - continuous illumination for
door lock. Open door within 20 seconds and approx. 2 seconds.
insert the ignition key into the ignition lock
within 10 seconds to prevent the alarm system Fault indication
from being triggered.
A double horn signal during locking indicates a
Note on operation defect in the central locking or alarm system. Have
If the door is not opened within approx. 20 sec- the defect remedied at an authorized Porsche
onds, automatic relocking takes place. The alarm dealer.
system will be triggered by the next unlocking of
the door: Overload protection
Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock to If the central locking system is operated more
switch off the alarm system. than ten times within a minute, further operation is
blocked for 30 seconds.
Emergency operation - closing
Lock the driver’s door with the key at the
door lock. If there is a defect in the central
locking system, all functioning elements of
the central locking system will be locked. The
alarm system is switched on. The passenger
compartment monitoring system is switched
off.

Controls, Instruments 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Unlocking Automatic door locking
Press the central locking button. Indicator light
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program
goes out.
diverse types of automatic door locking in the
If the doors were locked with the central locking control unit of the central locking system:
button, they can be opened by pulling the inner
door handle: Type 1
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
lock. switched on.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Type 2
Doors lock automatically when a speed of 3 mph -
6 mph (5 km/h - 10 km/h) is exceeded.

Type 3
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
switched on. If doors are opened with the engine
Central locking button running, they lock again automatically when a
speed of 3 mph - 6 mph (5 km/h - 10 km/h) is
The central locking button on the dashboard lets exceeded.
you lock and unlock both doors electrically.
Note Type 4
If the doors are locked with the key or remote The doors do not lock automatically.
control, they cannot be opened by pressing the Note
central locking button.
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
Locking the central locking button or opened by pulling on
the inside door handle twice.
Press the central locking button. Indicator light
in the button lights up if ignition is on. On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
the PCM can be used to activate automatic door
locking. Please observe the chapter “Individual

28 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Memory” in the separate PCM operating instruc-
tions.

Warning!
In an emergency situation where you need to
exit the car through an automatically locked
door, remember the following procedure to
open the door.
Unlock the doors by pressing the central
locking button or
pull the inside door handle twice to open the
door.

Controls, Instruments 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. this device must accept any interference The alarm system and passenger compartment
received, including interference that may monitoring system are switched off automatically
cause undesired operation. when the doors are unlocked.
Note
Cabriolet, Targa
The manufacturer is not responsible for any
radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized The passenger compartment monitoring system
modifications to this equipment. Such modification is always switched off when the convertible top or
could void the user’s authority to operate the sliding glass roof is open.
equipment.
Function indication
Warning! If the alarm system is activated, light-emitting
diode A in the central locking switch flashes.
Any changes or modifications not expressly If, after locking, the light-emitting diode does
approved by Porsche could void the user’s not flash or, after ten seconds, it emits double
authority to operate this equipment. flashes, then not all alarm contacts are closed.
Additionally, a brief horn signal sounds.
A - Light-emitting diode for alarm system
The alarm system and passenger compartment When the doors are unlocked, the alarm system
monitoring system are switched on when the doors and passenger compartment monitoring system
Alarm System, Passenger are locked with the key or remote control. are switched off and the light-emitting diode goes
off.
Compartment Monitoring Please observe the chapter ”CENTRAL
LOCKING” on page 26.
Readiness for operation When the alarm is armed, the following
Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the
areas are monitored
This device complies with: door lock and opening the door may activate
Part 15 of the FCC Rules the alarm system within 10 seconds. – Doors
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. – Luggage compartment lid
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
Switching off the alarm system if it is
– Engine compartment lid
tions: triggered accidentally
– Convertible-top lock (Cabriolet)
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- Unlock the vehicle with the remote control.
ence, and – Glass rear hatch (Targa)

30 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 – Glove compartment Fault indication
– Passenger compartment A double horn signal during locking indicates a
defect in the central locking or alarm system.
If one of these alarm contacts is interrupted, the
alarm horn sounds for approximately 3 minutes. Have the defect remedied at an authorized
Additionally, the emergency flasher flashes and Porsche dealer.
the passenger compartment light lightes for
approximately five minutes. When the alarm is
triggered, the light-emitting diode changes over to
double flashes.
In order not to limit the action range of the passen-
ger compartment monitoring system:
Do not fold the front seat backrests forward.

Deactivating the passenger compartment

monitoring system for one locking process
If a person or animal remains in the car while it is
locked, the passenger compartment monitoring
system must be switched off.
Quickly lock car twice. The doors are locked
but can be opened from the inside:
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Note
Inform any person remaining in the car that the
alarm system will be triggered if the door is
opened.

Controls, Instruments 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Opening/closing windows
Warning!
Risk of injury when the door windows close. Control over rocker switch
This applies especially if the windows are For the Cabriolet, select front or rear power
closed with the one-touch operation, because windows with rocker switch C. The selection
with this function the window goes up auto- is displayed by the respective light-emitting
matically. diode.
Make sure that fingers, hands, arms or The two rocker switches A and B in the driver’s
other body parts are not in the way when the door and the switch in the passenger’s door have a
windows are closed. two-stage function:
Remove the ignition key to shut off power to
the window switches when the vehicle is not
Opening
attended by a responsible person. Uninformed Press the rocker switch down to the first stage
persons could injure themselves by operating until the window has reached the desired
the power windows. position.
Do not leave children in the car unattended.
A - Power window in driver’s door Closing
B - Power window in passenger’s door Press the rocker switch upwards to the first
C - Cabriolet: Switching button for front/rear stage until the window has reached the desired
Warning!
power windows position.
Risk of an accident.
Power Windows Do not put anything on or near the windows
One-touch operation
that may interfere with the driver’s vision. Press the rocker switch upwards or down-
Readiness for operation of power windows wards to the second stage. Window moves to
– When the ignition is switched on (engine its final position. Press again to stop the win-
switched on or off) or dow in the desired position.
Cabriolet
– with doors closed and ignition key withdrawn, Coupc, Targa
When the convertible top is open, the rear side
but only until door is first opened. One-touch
windows can only be closed if the door windows One-touch operation for closing the passenger’s
operation for closing the door windows is
are closed. window is available once the window is approxi-
available only when the ignition is switched on.
mately half-way closed.

32 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Anti-crushing protection Storing end position of the windows
If a side window is blocked during closing, it will If the battery is disconnected and reconnected, the
stop and open again by about an inch. windows will not be raised automatically when the
door is closed.
Warning! 1. Close the windows with the rocker switch
once.
Risk of serious personal injuries. If the rocker
switch is pressed again within 10 seconds of 2. Press the rocker switch upwards again to
the window being blocked, the window will store the end position of the windows in the
close with its full closing force. Anti-crushing control unit.
protection is disabled.
Once the anti-crushing protection acts to stop
the window and opens it slightly, do not press
the rocker switch again within 10 seconds
without checking to make sure that nothing is
blocking the path of the window. The window
will close with full closing force.

One-touch operation is disabled for 10 seconds

after blockage of a side window.

Automatic window lowering

Please observe the chapter ”DOORS” on page
25.
Please observe the chapter ”CONVERTIBLE
TOP” on page 204.

Controls, Instruments 33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
Do not put anything on or near the windows or
the mirrors that may interfere with the driver’s
vision.

Adjusting
1. Switch on ignition.
2. By turning the control switch A, select the
driver’s side or the passenger’s side.
3. Move the door mirror glasses in the appropri-
ate direction by tilting the control switch.
Mirrors Door mirrors
If the electrical adjustment facility fails
Inside mirror Function Adjust mirror by pressing on the mirror face.
When the mirror is being adjusted, the anti-glare Before driving the vehicle, adjust the outside and
inside mirrors. It is important for safe driving that Automatically swivelling down mirror on the
lever must point forward.
you have clear, unobstructed vision to the rear. passenger’s side
Basic position: lever forward
Anti-glare position: lever back Please observe the chapter ”PARKING AIDS”
on page 64.
Please observe the chapter ”SEAT MEMORY”
on page 41.

34 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Sensor
Folding in door mirrors 1. Push mirror towards the door window and
B - Switch for automatic anti-glare operation
continue to hold it (high spring force).
C - Light-emitting diode
Warning! 2. Swivel the locking lever up to the stop and
slowly let go of the mirror.
Danger of injury to ngers if the mirror Automatic anti-glare interior mirror and
accidentally ips back when being folded door mirror
in.
Unfolding door mirrors
1. Push mirror towards the door window and Function
Exercise extreme caution when folding in
continue to hold it (high spring force). The
mirror by hand. Do not let go of the mirror Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
locking lever disengages automatically.
before the locking lever is locked or the mirror mirror measure the incident light. The mirrors
is fully unfolded. 2. Move mirror back to unfolded position by automatically change to anti-glare position or
hand. Do not let go of the mirror beforehand. revert to their normal state, depending on the
light intensity. When reverse gear is selected,
automatic anti-glare operation is switched off.

Controls, Instruments 35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note
Warning!
The incident light in the area of the sensors
must not be restricted, e.g. by stickers on the Risk of damage to the paintwork, leather
windshield. and plastic parts. Electrolyte uid can be
removed only while it is still wet.
Switching off the automatic anti-glare Clean the affected parts with water.
operation
Press switch B. Light-emitting diode C goes
out.

Switching on the automatic anti-glare

operation
Press switch B. Light-emitting diode C lights
up.

Warning!
Risk of injury. Electrolyte uid can emerge Rear window defogger, door
from a broken mirror glass. This uid irritates mirror heating
the skin and eyes.
The mirror heater is ready for operation when the
If the electrolyte fluid should come into contact ignition is on.
with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse it off
with clean water. See a doctor if necessary. Switching on
Press button. The light-emitting diode in the
button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heater switches off
automatically. The heater can be switched back on
by pressing the button again.

36 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Switching off
Press button. The light-emitting diode in the
button goes out.

Controls, Instruments 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Seat Adjustment
Warning!
General information In the cabriolet, the windstop may be dam-
aged during seat adjustment and when folding
Warning! back the front-seat backrest.
The seat may move unexpectedly if you Adjust seat so that the seat backrest does not
attempt to adjust while driving. This could touch the windstop.
cause sudden loss of control, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in Seat position
motion. The backrest locks must be engaged
at all times while the vehicle is in motion. An ergonomically correct sitting position is
important for safe and fatigue-free driving. We
recommend the following procedure for adjusting
the driver’s seat to suit individual requirements:
Warning!
1. Vehicles with manual transmission:
Safety belts only offer protection when Adjust the seat until, with the clutch pedal
the backrest is upright and the belts are fully depressed, your leg remains at a slight
properly positioned on the body. Improperly angle. Vehicles with Tiptronic S: Adjust the
positioned safety belts or safety belts worn seat until, with your left foot on the footrest,
by passengers in an excessively reclined your left leg remains at a slight angle.
position can cause serious personal injury or
death in an accident. 2. Rest your outstretched arm on the steering
wheel. Set the backrest angle and the steer-
Do not operate the car with the driver or ing-wheel position so that your wrist rests
passenger backrests excessively reclined on the outer rim of the steering wheel. At
(see “Seat position”). the same time, the shoulders must still be in
noticeable contact with the backrest.
3. Adjust the seat height to give yourself enough
headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
4. Electrically adjustable seat: Adjust the seat
angle until your thighs rest lightly on the seat
cushion.

38 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C e Backrest angle
Operate switch C until the desired backrest
angle is reached.

Manually adjustable comfort seat/sports Electrically adjustable comfort

seat seat/sports seat
A e Seat height Adjustment
Use lever A in a pumping movement: Press the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrow until the desired setting is reached.
Upwards - seat moves upwards
Downwards - seat moves downwards

B e Fore and aft

Raise locking lever B. Move seat to desired
position and release lever. Ensure that the seat
engages correctly.

Controls, Instruments 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A e Seat height adjustment Seat backrest
B e Fore-and-aft position adjustment Folding forward
Pull up lever H in the side part of the backrest
C e Seat angle adjustment and fold the backrest forward.
D e Backrest angle adjustment Folding back
E e Lumbar support (pelvis and spinal column Tilt back and engage the backrest so that it
support) cannot tip forward when the car is braked.

To permit a relaxed sitting posture, the backrest

curvature is continuously adjustable in vertical and
horizontal directions for individual pelvis and spinal
column support.
Press the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrow until the desired backrest curvature
is reached.

F e Adjusting the backrest side bolsters

(electrically adjustable sports seat only)
Push forward or pull backward switch F until
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
the body.

G e Adjusting the seat cushion side bolsters

(electrically adjustable sports seat only)
Push forward or pull backward switch G until
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
the body.

40 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation with person buttons 2, 3
Warning!
Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled recall of Storing seat position
a seat setting. 1. Switch on ignition. Reverse gear must not be
engaged.
Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any
of the seat adjustment buttons. 2. Set the desired seat and door-mirror positions.
Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. 3. Keep memory button M depressed and
additionally press person button 2 or 3. The
individual setting is now stored under the
desired person button.

Recalling seat position

The seat position can only be called up when the
vehicle is stationary.
1. Switch on the ignition or open the driver’s
M - Memory button door.
1 - Key button 2. Press person button until the seat has reached
2, 3 - Person buttons its final position. The setting of door mirrors
and lumbar support will be completed even if
Seat Memory the person button is not kept depressed.
Note
Individual seat and door mirror settings Automatic seat adjustment can be interrupted
Individual seat and door mirror settings can be immediately by releasing the button.
stored and recalled for the driver’s position.
Further individual setting options are available
in vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus.
Please observe the chapter “Individual Memory” in
the separate PCM operating instructions.

Controls, Instruments 41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating with the remote control of the 5. Set passenger’s door mirror to desired final
car key position.
6. Keep memory button M depressed and
Individual assignment of the remote control additionally press key button 1. The individual
Each remote control (up to six) can be assigned setting is now assigned to this remote control
an individual seat and door mirror position. and to the key button.
The stored seat and door mirror position is set
automatically when the vehicle is unlocked using Recalling seat position
the corresponding remote control. Unlock the locked vehicle or the luggage
compartment with the remote control. The
Storing seat position stored seat position is automatically set.
1. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key. The seat position assigned to a remote control
Reverse gear must not be engaged. can also be recalled with the key button 1 if the
2. Set the desired seat and door-mirror positions. corresponding key was used to switch on the
ignition.
3. Keep memory button M depressed and
additionally press key button 1. The individual If no seat position has been assigned to a remote
setting is now assigned to this remote control control, the key button will not work.
and to the key button. Note on operation

Storing individual lowered position of the Automatic seat adjustment can be interrupted
immediately:
passenger’s door mirror as a parking aid
by switching on the ignition,
Once the driver’s seat setting has been stored, an
individual lowered position of the passenger’s door by pressing the central locking button,
mirror may be stored for driving in reverse: by pressing any memory or seat adjustment
1. Apply the handbrake. button.
2. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key.
Clearing the stored seat position
3. Engage reverse gear.
1. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key.
4. Select passenger side with mirror switch. The
2. Press memory button twice and key button 1
passenger’s mirror swivels downwards.
once consecutively.

42 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Low heating power
Press the rocker-switch symbol again. One
light-emitting diode in the button lights up.

Switching off
Press button. Light-emitting diodes go out.

A - Seat heating, left

B - Seat heating, right

Heated Seats
Switching on
Readiness for operation
Two-stage seat heating is ready for operation when
the ignition is on.

High heating power

Press button. Both light-emitting diodes in the
button light up.

Controls, Instruments 43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cabriolet
Do not fold up the rear seat backrests with the
windstop installed.

Rear Seat Backrests

Folding forward
Extra storage space is gained by folding the rear
seat backrests forward.
Pull lever forward and fold the backrest
forward.

Folding back
Tilt the backrest back until you feel it click into
place. When doing so, make sure that the seat
belt is properly routed (see gure).

44 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Steering Wheel Adjustment
Adjusting steering wheel height and
longitudinal direction

Warning!
Risk of accident. The steering wheel may
move further than desired if you attempt to
adjust it when driving. You can lose control of
the vehicle, causing serious personal injury or
death.
Do not adjust the steering wheel when driving.

1. Insert ignition key fully into ignition lock.

2. Push the locking lever downwards.
3. Adjust steering wheel to fit the chosen
backrest angle and your seat position by
moving the steering wheel up or down and
longitudinally.
4. Swivel locking lever back until you feel it
engage. If necessary, move steering wheel
slightly longitudinally.

Controls, Instruments 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Multi-Functional Steering Wheel Turn volume control
Upwards - increase volume.
Function Downwards - decrease volume.
Press volume control
Warning! To switch volume/mute on and off.

There is a danger of accident if you set or Turn rotary knob

operate the on-board computer, radio, To select/mark function in the PCM within
navigation system, telephone or other a menu. To do this, turn the rotary knob
equipment when driving. Operating these upward or downward.
devices while driving could distract you from Press rotary knob
trafc and cause you to lose control of the To activate selected function.
vehicle.
Press screen button
Operate these components while driving only if To call the stored PCM function.
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. The button can be assigned the desired
function in the PCM.
Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only while the vehicle is stationary. Press Back button
Readiness for operation of To move back in the PCM menu.

Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, you multi-functional steering wheel Press Handset Pickup button
can use the function keys of the multi-functional The multi-functional steering wheel is ready for To accept a telphone call.
steering wheel to operate the following Porsche operation when the ignition and PCM are switched Press Handset Hangup button
communication systems: on. To end or refuse a telephone call.
– PCM
Operating the function keys
– Telephone
Please read the separate PCM operating
– CD changer
instructions before operating the function
keys.
The rotary knobs at the top left and right of the
steering wheel can also be pressed.

46 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sun Visors
Swivel the sun visors
Swing the sun visors down to prevent glare
from the front.
Coupb, Cabriolet: To prevent glare from
the side, unclip the sun visor from the inner
bracket and swivel round so that it is in front of
the door window.

Vanity mirror
The vanity mirror on the rear of the sun visor is
covered by a lid.

Warning!
Risk of injury in an accident or risk of damage Coupé, Cabriolet Targa
to mirror lid and convertible top.
The vanity mirror illumination is switched on The vanity mirror illumination is switched on
Keep the lid closed while driving and when
automatically when the cover is opened (arrow). automatically when the sliding cover is opened
closing the convertible top.
(arrow). The light is switched off when the sun
visor is in its upper or lower end position.

Warning!
Risk of damage.
Do not force the lid beyond its end position.

Controls, Instruments 47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Safety Belts Pregnant women should position the belt as If the belts show damage to webbing, bind-
low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it ings, buckles or retractors, they should be
General information is not pressing against the abdomen. replaced to ensure safe operation.
Belts should not be worn twisted. Do not modify or disassemble the safety belts
Warning! in your vehicle.
Do not wear belts over rigid or breakable
Always make sure your and your passengers’ objects in or on your clothing, such as eye The belts must be kept clean or the retractors
safety belts are properly fastened while the glasses, pens, keys, etc. as these may cause may not work properly.
vehicle is in motion. Failure to follow safety injury.
Please observe the chapter ”CAR CARE
belt warnings may result in serious personal
Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere INSTRUCTIONS” on page 257.
injury or death.
with proper positioning of belts.
Never bleach or dye safety belts.
For your and your passengers’ protection, use Belts must not rub against sharp objects or
safety belts at all times while the vehicle is in Do not allow safety belts to retract until they
damage may occur to the belt.
motion. are completely dry after cleaning or this may
Two occupants should never share the same cause damage to the belt.
Use appropriate child restraint systems for all belt at the same time.
small children.

Belt tensioner
Warning!
Warning! Depending on the force of an impact, fastened
Care and maintenance
Proper wearing of safety belts safety belts are tightened in an accident.
Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that
Safety belts must be positioned on the body as may prevent a secure locking. The belt tensioners are triggered in:
to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding
Belts that have been subjected to excessive – Front, side and rear impacts of sufficient
forward. Improperly positioned safety belts
stretch forces in an accident must be inspect- severity.
can cause serious personal injury or death in
case of an accident. ed or replaced to ensure their continued effec- – For the Cabriolet, in cases of vehicle rollover.
tiveness in restraining you. The same applies
The shoulder belt should always rest on your to belt tensioner systems which have been Note
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be triggered. In addition, the anchor points of the The belt-tensioner system can be triggered only
worn behind your back or under your arm. belts should be checked. once; the system must be replaced afterward.
For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt If safety belts do not work properly, see your If there is a fault in the belt-tensioner system, the
should be worn low across the hips. authorized Porsche dealer immediately. airbag warning light lights up.

48 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Work may be performed on the belt-tensioner Pull shoulder section to make sure belt fits
system only by an authorized Porsche dealer. snugly across the pelvis.
Smoke is released when the belt tensioners are
Belts should fit snugly across the pelvis and
triggered. This does not indicate a fire in the
chest. Make sure there is no slack in the belt.
vehicle.

Safety Belt Warning System Releasing the safety belt

Push in release button (arrow) on buckle. Belt
An audio-visual warning system is interconnect- tongue will spring out of buckle.
ed with the driver’s safety belt. To release a latched belt, lean back to take the
Every time the ignition is turned on, the gong will body pressure off the belt.
sound for about 6 seconds to remind driver and To store lap/shoulder belt, allow the belt to
passenger to buckle up. In addition, the gong retract as you guide the latch to its stowed
will sound for approx. 90 seconds if vehicle position.
speed exceeds 15 mph/24 km/h. The safety
belt warning lights in the instrument panel and Please observe the chapter ”SMALL ADULT
on-board computer will go off as soon as the driver PASSENGERS” on page 59.
has buckled up. Fastening the safety belt
Inertia reel retractor Assume a comfortable sitting position.

The combination lap/shoulder belt with inertia reel Please observe the chapter ”SEAT POSITION”
locking mechanism adjusts automatically to your on page 38.
size and movements as long as the pull on the belt The shoulder belt should always rest on your
is slow. upper body. The shoulder belt should never be
Rapid deceleration during hard braking or a worn behind your back or under your arm.
collision locks the belt. The belt will also lock Grasp belt and pull the belt in a continuous
when you drive up or down a steep hill or in a sharp slow motion across your chest and lap.
curve, otherwise, the shoulder belt will not inhibit
Insert belt tongue into buckle on inboard side
your upper body movement.
of seat. Push down until it securely locks with
an audible click. Pull the belt to check.

Controls, Instruments 49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cleaning the safety belts
If it becomes necessary to clean the belts, you can
use any mild washing agent. Allow the belts to dry
prior to retracting, but avoid direct sunlight.
Only use suitable cleaners. If unsuitable
cleaners are used or any attempt is made
to dye or bleach the belts, the webbing may be
weakened and thus constitute a safety risk.

Safety belt height adjustment (Coupc and

Targa)
Adjusting belt height
The height of the belt deflectors for the driver’s
seat and passenger’s seat can be adjusted. Adjust
the height of the safety belt so that it runs across
the middle of the shoulder, not against the neck.
Upward - push belt deflector up.
Downward - press button (arrow) and move
belt deflector.

50 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Airbag Systems Always keep the lid of the door storage com-
Danger! partment closed. Objects must not protrude
General information To provide optimal occupant protection, air- out of the door storage compartment.
The airbags in combination with the safety belts bags must inate at very high speed. If you No changes may be made to the wiring or
make up a safety system which offers the driver are not wearing your safety belt or are too components of the airbag system.
and the passenger the greatest known protection close to the airbag when it is deployed, inat-
ing airbags can result in serious personal inju- Do not add any additional coverings or stickers
from injuries in case of accident. Your vehicle is to the steering wheel or in the area of the
equipped with a weight sensing system for the ry or death. Improper handling of the weight
sensing system can unintentionally impair passenger’s airbag, side airbags and head
front passenger’s seat in accordance with U.S. airbags. Doing so may adversely affect the
Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard switching the passenger’s airbag off and on.
functioning of the airbag system or cause
208. Make sure there are no people, animals or harm to the occupants if the airbag system
Even if your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the objects between the driver or passenger and should deploy.
safety belts must be worn at all times, because the area into which the airbag inflates.
Do not modify the seat coverings. Do not
the front airbag system is only deployed by frontal Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering attach additional cushions, protective cover-
collisions with an impact of sufficient severity. wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full ings, or pillows to the passenger’s seat. Do
Below the deployment threshold of the airbag vehicle control. not affix things to the passenger’s seat or cov-
system, and during types of collisions which do not Always hold the steering wheel by the outer er it with other materials. Do not cover the
cause the actuation of the system, the safety belts rim. Never rest your hands on the airbag back of the backrest. Do not make changes
provide the primary protection to the occupants panel. to the passenger’s seat and to the seat base
when correctly worn. Therefore, all persons frame.
within the vehicle must wear safety belts at all Always fasten seat belts because triggering
of the airbag system depends on the force and Do not undertake any wiring for electrical
times (in many states, state law requires the use of accessory equipment in the vicinity of the
safety belts). angle of impact.
airbag wiring harnesses. Doing so may
Please observe the chapter ”SAFETY BELTS” Do not transport heavy objects on or in front disable the airbag system or cause inadvertent
on page 48. of the passenger’s seat. These could impair inflation.
the function of the airbag, the seat belts, and
The front airbags are located under the padded weight sensing. If the warning light comes on, the airbag
steering wheel panel on the driver’s side and, on system should be repaired immediately by
the passenger’s side, in the dashboard. The side Do not hang objects (e.g. jackets, coats, coat your authorized Porsche dealer.
airbags for the front seats are installed on the hangers) over the backrest.
side in the seat backrests. The head airbags are
installed in the door linings.

Controls, Instruments 51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Always keep feet in the footwell while driving. event of a side impact of corresponding force, the Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat side airbag on the impact side is triggered. diagnostic module. This module will record the
area. Do not lean against the inside of the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver
The inflation process generates the amount of
door or outside the window while the vehicle is and front passenger when the airbags and/or belt
gas required to fill the airbags at the necessary
moving. tensioner work.
pressure in fractions of a second.
Using accessories not approved by Porsche
Airbags help to protect the head and upper body, Advanced Airbag
can cause the weight sensing system to be
while simultaneously damping the motion of the
impaired. Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing
driver and passenger in the impact direction in the
Do not squeeze objects, such as the fire event of a frontal impact or side impact. system for the passenger’s seat in accordance
extinguisher, or first aid kit under the seat. with U.S. Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
In order to help provide protection in severe Standard 208. Depending on the weight acting on
Only have seats removed and installed by collisions which can cause death and serious injury, the front passenger’s seat, the front passenger’s
an authorized Porsche dealer so that weight airbags must inflate extremely rapidly. Such high airbag will automatically be switched on and off.
sensing components will not be damaged. speed inflation has a negative but unavoidable side
effect, which is that it can and does cause injuries, Depending on the angle and force of impact, the
Give your passenger all of the information in front passenger’s airbag which is activated will be
including facial and arm abrasions, bruising and
this chapter. triggered during a collision.
broken bones. You can help minimize such injuries
by always wearing your safety belts. Precondition for switching the front passenger’s
Note There are many types of accidents in which airbag on and off, depending on weight:
Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, door airbags are not expected to deploy. These include – Vehicles equipped with key-operated airbag
lining, seats) may be disassembled only by an accidents where the airbags would provide no deactivation device: Switch position AUTO.
authorized Porsche dealer. benefit, such as a rear impact against your vehicle.
– Ignition key is inserted.
Other accidents where the airbags are designed
When disposing of a used airbag unit, our safety
not to deploy are those where the risk of injury from
instructions must be followed. These instructions
the airbag deployment could exceed any protective Seat adjustment for the front passenger’s
can be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer. seat
benefits, such as in low speed accidents or higher
speed accidents where the vehicle decelerates If the seat is in an extreme position (e.g., the
Function of the airbag system over a longer time. Since airbag deployment does backrest is in contact with the rear seat), the
Airbags are a supplemental safety system. Your not occur in all accidents, this further emphasizes backrest can warp. Warping of the backrest can
primary protection comes from your safety belts. the need for you and your passengers to always lead to malfunctions.
wear safety belts.
The front airbags are triggered during a frontal
collision of sufficient force and direction. In the

52 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Correct the seat adjustment. Ensure that the call 1-800-PORSCHE prior to having your vehicle
seat is not jammed and is self-supporting. modified.
Ensure that the backrest is in the upright
position. Automatic deactivation of the front
Do not transport a load and objects in the rear passenger’s airbags
footwell and under the passenger’s seat. If the
load or objects are under the seat, it can cause Danger!
malfunctions.
The use of a child restraint system in the
If the weight on the passenger’s seat is reduced front passenger’s seat can result in serious
significantly, e.g., by supporting weight on the personal injury or death to the child from an
armrest, the passenger’s airbag can be switched airbag deployment.
off.
Please observe the chapter ”PASSENGER
Select an upright seat position, and do not
AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT
support weight on the armrests or lean out of
LIGHT UP” on page 54.
the window. Always keep feet in the footwell
while driving. Do not put feet on the dashboard Before transporting a child on the passenger’s
or the seat area. Do not lean against the inside seat: A - PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
of the door or outside the window while the Please observe the chapter ”CHILD
vehicle is moving. RESTRAINT SYSTEMS” on page 57. – When an adult is seated in the front seat, the
If the passenger’s seat is warped significantly, a front airbag remains active on the passenger‘s
message is displayed on the on-board computer: side.
– When an up to one-year old child is seated
Correct the seat adjustment. in the child restraint system, the front airbag is Note on operation
Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS automatically deactivated on the passenger’s
Although not desired, it can occur in the case
ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE side.
of heavier children that the passenger’s
ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143. airbags remain active or, in the case of
very light adults or young persons, that the
Vehicle modications to accommodate passenger’s airbag is deactivated.
persons with disabilities The condition of the passenger’s airbag
Because modifications to your vehicle could system is shown by the indicator lamp A.
compromise your advanced airbag system, please If in doubt:

Controls, Instruments 53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Please observe the chapter ”PASSENGER Warning light and warning
Danger!
AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT message
LIGHT UP” on page 54. Risk of serious personal injury or death
Faults are indicated by a warning light in the
Please observe the chapter ”KEY-OPERATED due to the passenger airbag triggering
instrument panel and a message on the on-board
AIRBAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE” on page 55. unintentionally. When the ignition is on and
computer.
the up to one-year old child is seated in the
Please observe the chapter ”CHILD child restraint system on the passenger’s Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS” on page 57. seat, the indicator lamp “PASSENGER AIRBAG ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE
Please observe the chapter ”LATCH SYSTEM” OFF” must be on. If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143.
on page 61. OFF” indicator lamp does not light up, it could In the following cases you should imme-
indicate a fault in the system. In this case: diately consult an authorized Porsche
Note
Child restraint systems facing forwards: dealer in order to assure the airbag sys-
After inserting the ignition key, the PASSEN- tem is functioning properly:
GER AIRBAG OFF warning light lights up for a Install on the rear seats.
few seconds as a bulb check. Child restraint systems facing rearwards: On – If the warning light does not light up when the
vehicles with key-operated airbag deactivation ignition key is inserted or
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp device: Switch to position OFF. – If the warning light does not go out once the
lights up Child restraint systems facing rearwards: engine is running or
– The passenger’s airbag is switched off. On vehicles without key-operated airbag – If the warning light appears while driving.
deactivation device: Do not use a child
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp restraint system in the front passenger’s seat. Airbag maintenance
does not light up Have the fault remedied at your nearest In order to ensure long-term functioning, the airbag
authorized Porsche dealer. system must be inspected by an authorized
– The passenger’s airbag is active and ready for
operation. Porsche dealer at the intervals recommended in
Note your Maintenance Booklet.
– If the passenger’s seat is not occupied, the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will The key switch for switching off the passenger’s Note
also not light up, even though the passenger’s airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment If you sell your Porsche, notify the purchaser that
airbag is switched off. bracket are not installed at the factory. They can the vehicle is equipped with airbags, and refer
be retrofitted. them to the chapter, “Airbag Systems“, in the
Please see your authorized Porsche dealer. Owner’s Manual (safety and disposal rules).

54 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death for
passenger if passenger’s airbag remains
switched off after the child restraint system is
removed.
Make sure that the key switch is switched to
AUTO once the child seat has been removed,
in order to provide protection to the adult
occupants.

Warning light “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF”

If the airbag on the passenger’s side is switched
off:
A - PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp – Warning light “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF”
Further information on the airbag system can be
is continuously lit when the ignition key is
found on stickers attached to the sun visors.
inserted.
Switch position AUTO - passenger’s airbag system
For special recommendations on the use of child
is active
restraints: Danger!
Switch position OFF - passenger’s airbag system is
Please observe the chapter ”CHILD Risk of serious personal injury or death from
switched off
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS” on page 57. the passenger’s airbag. If the “PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF” warning light “A” is not lit when
Key-operated airbag deactivation device the ignition key is inserted and the Airbag OFF
If in doubt about the status of the airbag, you switch is switched to the OFF-Position, this
can switch off the passenger’s airbag on the key could indicate a fault in the system.
switch. Do not install a child restraint system on the
Switch off the passenger’s airbag on the key passenger’s seat.
switch using the car key.

Controls, Instruments 55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Have the fault remedied immediately. Please
see your authorized Porsche dealer.

Note
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
be retrofitted.
Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.

56 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Child Restraint Systems – When using an infant or child restraint system,
Danger! be sure to follow all manufacturer’s instruc-
Porsche recommends that all infants and children The use of a child restraint system in the tions on installation and use.
be restrained in child restraint systems at all times front passenger’s seat can result in serious – Infants and small children should never be held
while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with personal injury or death to the child from on the lap, nor should they share a safety belt
applicable laws. an airbag deployment. To reduce risk of with another occupant while the vehicle is in
Use only child restraint systems with the LATCH- injury from an inating airbag in an accident, motion.
system recommended by Porsche. These sys- Porsche strongly recommends:
– Children too big for child restraint systems
tems have been tested and adjusted to the interior
Please observe the chapter ”PASSENGER should use regular safety belts. A shoulder
of your Porsche and the appropriate child age
AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT belt can be used providing it does not cross
groups. Other systems have not been tested and
LIGHT UP” on page 54. the face or the neck of the child.
could entail an increased risk of injury or death.
Please observe the chapter ”CHILD – Choose a child restraint system according to
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compati-
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS” on page 57. the age and size of the child.
ble at your authorized Porsche dealer.
– Child restraint systems that are damaged or
Always observe the separate installation
Note have been heavily stressed in an accident must
instructions for your child seat.
be replaced immediately.
The use of infant or child restraints is required by The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not – Do not affix things to child restraint systems or
law in all 50 states of the U.S. and all Canadian
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted. cover it with other materials.
provinces. The child restraint system should be
one that complies with U.S. Federal/Canadian Please see your authorized Porsche dealer. – Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should to advise you about the installation possibility
be secured by a lap belt or lap belt portion of a for a Porsche child restraint system which
Danger!
lap-shoulder belt or for child seats equipped with allows a key-operated airbag deactivation of
the LATCH sytem (Lower Anchorage and Tether Risk of serious personal injury or death to the the passenger’s airbag.
for Children, also known as ISOFIX) to the LATCH child. – The key-operated airbag deactivation device
anchorages. A statement by the seat manufacturer
Follow all child restraint instructions and installation requires special programming
of compliance with this standard can be found
warnings in this manual. available only from your authorized Porsche
on the instruction label on the restraint and in the
dealer.
instruction manual provided with the restraint.
Please observe the chapter ”KEY-OPERATED
AIRBAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE” on page 55.

Controls, Instruments 57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Direction of installation for child restraint Note Using child restraint systems in the front
systems If a child seat with top tether is adapted for use passenger seat
on the front seat, the rear right (passenger’s side)
Children up to 9 months old anchor point must be used for anchoring the top
Danger!
Children of this age must be transported in a tether. It is then not permitted for a passenger to
restraint system which is installed on the passen- use the rear right (passenger’s side) seat. It is then The use of a child restraint system in the front
ger’s seat facing rearward. not permitted to install a child restraint system on passenger seat can result in serious personal
the rear right (passenger’s side) seat. injury or death to the child from an airbag
The passenger’s airbag must be deactivated.
Please observe the chapter ”CHILD deployment. To reduce risk of injury from
RESTRAINT ANCHORAGES” on page 62. an inating airbag in an accident, Porsche
Children aged between 9 months and 6 years strongly recommends:
Children of this age are held in child restraint
Please observe the chapter ”PASSENGER
systems facing forward. Whenever possible,
AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT
these child restraint systems should be installed on
LIGHT UP” on page 54.
the rear seats.
Please observe the chapter ”CHILD
The passenger’s airbag must be deactivated
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS” on page 57.
when these systems are used on the front
passenger’s seat.

Children aged between 6 and 12 years Child restraint system for up to one-year old
Children of this age are held in child restraint children
systems facing forward. Whenever possible,
– Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
these child restraint systems should be installed on indicator lamp lights up.
the rear seats.
– Adjust the passenger’s seat as far away from
The passenger’s airbag must be deactivated
the airbag as possible.
when these systems are used on the passen-
ger’s seat. The passenger’s airbag must be
activated for children weighing over 59 lbs.
(27 kg).

58 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Small adult passengers Automatic locking retractor
Danger!
Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
Risk of serious personal injury or death The safety belts for the front passenger and rear
indicator lamp does not light up.
due to the passenger’s airbag triggering seats are equipped with an automatic locking
unintentionally. When the ignition is on and retractor for securing the child restraint system.
Danger! When activated, this retractor allows you to
the up to one-year old child is seated in the
child restraint system on the passenger’s securely fasten the child restraint system in place
Risk of serious personal injury or death due
seat the indicator lamp „PASSENGER AIRBAG so that inadvertent movements will not occur.
to the passenger’s airbag not triggering.
OFF“ must be on. If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG When the ignition is on and the small adult
OFF” indicator lamp does not light up, it could passenger is seated on the passenger’s seat, Danger!
indicate a fault in the system. In this case: the indicator lamp “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” The use of a child restraint system on the front
must be off. If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” passenger seat can result in serious personal
On vehicles with key-operated airbag deactiva-
indicator lamp lights up, it could indicate a injury or death to the child from an airbag
tion device: Switch to position OFF.
fault in the system. In this case: deployment. To reduce risk of injury from
On vehicles without key-operated airbag an inating airbag in an accident, Porsche
Carry the passenger on the rear seat.
deactivation device: Do not use a child strongly recommends:
restraint system in the front passenger’s seat. Have the fault remedied at the nearest
authorized Porsche dealer. Under all normal circumstances, forward
Have the fault remedied at your nearest
facing child seats must be placed in the rear.
authorized Porsche dealer.

Before transporting a child on the passenger’s

Child restraint system for children older than seat:
one year
Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing
system for the passenger’s seat in accordance
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
208. Depending on the weight acting on the
passenger’s seat, the passenger’s airbag will
automatically be switched on or off.

Controls, Instruments 59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Check the condition of the passenger’s airbag
system shown by the indicator lamp A in the
central console.

Activating the automatic locking retractor

1. If a child restraint system must be fastened to
the passenger’s seat, adjust the passenger’s
seat as far away from the airbag as possible.
2. Fasten child seat.
3. Pull the safety belt retractor completely out. At
this point the locking mechanism is activated.
4. Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle
and make certain that it is properly latched.
Make no more adjustments to the seat.
A - PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 5. Allow the safety belt to retract until it is tight
on the child restraint system. You may further
Please observe the chapter ”CHILD tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS” on page 57. of it to retract. Make sure that excessive seat
belt forces do not occur by moving the seat
with the child seat installed.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death to Releasing the safety belt
the child, when excessive force is acting on
1. Unbuckle the safety belt latch.
the passenger’s seat due to the seat belt. In
such cases, the passenger’s airbag can be 2. Then make certain that the belt has fully
switched on unintentionally. retracted. At this point the automatic locking
feature will be disengaged. Seek appropriate
After fastening the child restraint system, do advice from your authorized Porsche dealer
not adjust the seat. about the possible installation of a Porsche
child restraint system.

60 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 LATCH System
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s seat
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted.
Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Porsche recommends the use of a Porsche Child
Seat with Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children
system (LATCH). These systems have been tested
and adjusted to the interior of your Porsche and the
appropriate child age groups. Other systems have
not been tested and could entail an increased risk
of injury.
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compati-
ble at your authorized Porsche dealer.
Always observe the separate installation Installing a LATCH child seat system
instructions for your child seat. 1. Secure the child seat to retaining lugs A as
Please observe the chapter ”CHILD outlined in the instruction manual for the child
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS” on page 57. seat.
2. Pull the child seat to check that both fastening
points are engaged correctly.
Note
Make sure that the key switch is switched to AUTO
once the child seat has been removed, in order to
provide protection to the adult occupants.

Controls, Instruments 61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Child Restraint Anchorages Only attach one child seat tether per anchor-
age.
Coupc and Targa
Please observe the chapter ”SMALL ADULT
PASSENGERS” on page 59.
If your child restraint seat or seats require the use
of a tether strap, you will want to use the anchor
points provided behind the rear seat backrests
under the carpet. To ensure proper installation, see
your authorized Porsche dealer.
Note
If a child seat with top tether is adapted for use
on the front seat, the rear right (passenger’s side)
anchor point must be used for anchoring the top
tether. It is then not permitted for a passenger to
use the rear right (passenger’s side) seat.

Warning!
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly tted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adults
safety belts or harnesses. Such use could
result in serious personal injury or death.
Do not misuse the child restraint anchorages.
They are not designed to withstand loads
imposed by adults.

62 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rollover Protection System panel. Extension of the supplemental safety bars is
Danger! no longer ensured.
Function of the Rollover Protection Risk of death or serious injury. See your authorized Porsche dealer immedi-
System Do not block area of supplemental safety bars ately and have the fault remedied.
The Rollover Protection System on the Cabriolet with objects. In the event of a deployment
consists of two supplemental safety bars that event, such objects could potentially prevent Lowering the supplemental safety bars
together with the front windshield frame help to such deployment from occuring, or such after deployment
create occupant survival space in case of rollover. objects could impact the car occupants at high Have this work performed by an authorized
Because of the extreme and unpredictable forces speed. Porsche dealer.
which can be encountered in a rollover, it is not
Do not tamper with or work on wiring and or
possible to guarantee that occupants will be
components of Rollover Protection System.
protected from all contact with exterior objects
or the ground. However, the Rollover Protection All work regarding this system must be carried
System is designed to maintain the occupant out by your authorized Porsche dealer.
survival space. Check functions and periodic service intervals
The protective devices are located behind each according to maintenance schedule (see your
rear seat and rapidly deploy within a fraction authorized Porsche dealer).
of a second. The Rollover Protection System is
activated automatically in the event of an accident
or extreme driving situation. If necessary, the Danger!
seat-belt tensioners will be activated.
To avoid damage to the convertible top:
Please observe the chapter ”BELT TENSION-
ER” on page 48. If the supplemental safety bars are extended
for any reason, do not open or close converti-
They can deploy under: ble top.

– Extreme tilting of the vehicle.

– Loss of ground contact (e.g. Going over the
crest of a hill at high speed). Warning light

Faults in the Rollover Protection System are indi-

cated by the airbag warning light in the instrument

Controls, Instruments 63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Parking Aids
Caution!
Parking assistant To avoid damaging the sensors:

Function of the parking assistant Maintain sufficient distance when cleaning with
steam-jet units.
When the driver backs up, the parking assistant
system indicates the distance between the car
and a large obstacle behind it, by means of signal
tones. Signal tones/function
When reverse gear is selected, the parking
Warning! assistant confirms that it is switched on by issuing
Risk of serious personal injury or death. a short signal tone.
Parking assistant cannot detect small objects A detected obstacle is signalled by an intermit-
such as children and pets. Despite use of the tent tone. The intervals decrease as the obstacle
parking assistant system, the driver is still is approached.
responsible for taking due care and assessing
Ultrasound sensors A continuous tone sounds when the distance
obstacles when backing up.
becomes less than one foot. This continuous tone
Make sure that no persons, especially small can stop if the obstacle is approached closer than
children, animals or obstacles are within the Sensors one foot.
maneuvring area. Four ultrasound sensors in the rear bumper The radio volume should not be so loud as to
measure the distance to the closest obstacle. drown out the signal tones.
The parking assistant system is activated automati- – Range middle sensors around 60 in./150 cm
cally when reverse gear is selected and the ignition Limits of ultrasonic measurement
– Range outer sensors around 24 in./60 cm
is on. The parking assistant system cannot detect:
Obstacles cannot be detected in the “blind” sensor
Note area (e.g. near the ground). – sound-absorbing obstacles (e.g. winter
Be aware that the parking assistant system is operation, powder snow),
Note
not switched on if the car rolls backward without – sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass
reverse gear being engaged. The sensors must always be kept free of dust,
surfaces, flat painted surfaces)
ice and snow in order to ensure that they are fully
functional. – and very thin obstacles.

64 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 – Other ultrasound sources (e.g. pneumatic – Set the control switch A to “passenger’s side”.
brakes of other vehicles, jackhammers) can
– Reverse gear must be engaged.
interfere with detection of obstacles.
Returning mirror glass to its original position
Fault indication
Drive forwards with a speed of over 4 mph
The parking assistant system indicates a fault in
(6 km/h) or
two ways:
Set the control switch A to “driver’s side”.
– After reverse gear has been selected, the
short signal tone is followed by a continuous
tone of the same pitch: This indicates that
sensors are soiled or covered with ice.
– After reverse gear has been selected, the
short signal tone is followed by a continuous
tone with a much lower pitch: This indicates
a general system fault. Please have the fault
remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
A - Control switch for door mirror adjustment

Swivelling down mirror glass as a parking

aid
Function
Please observe the chapter ”SEAT MEMORY”
on page 41.
– When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass on the passenger’s side swivels down
slightly to show the curb area.

Preconditions
– Vehicle must be equipped with seat memory.

Controls, Instruments 65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Four-Wheel Drive Obey all traffic laws. Dynamometer testing procedure

Engine power Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces conduct

emissions inspection/maintenance testing
With the four-wheel drive, the engine power is involving the use of two-wheel dynamometer. A
variably distributed to the front and rear wheels. two-wheeled dynamometer is a treadmill type
Power distribution and wheel speed compensation device upon which a single axle of the car, the
between the front and rear axles is realised with a driving axle of the vehicle, rotates to simulate
viscous multiple-disc clutch. vehicle operation on the road while the vehicle
Distribution of the engine power is dependent upon remains stationary.
the wheel speed difference between the two axles. The full-time four-wheel drive system of your
The viscous multiple-disc clutch always delivers vehicle cannot be disabled. Severe damage to
sufficient drive power to the front wheels (approx. the powertrain can result if tested on a two-wheel
5% to 40%) to ensure optimum traction even on a dynamometer.
poor road surface.
In combination with the Porsche Stability Warning!
Management (PSM), four-wheel drive improves
handling and increases driving stability. To avoid severe powertrain damage and
a possible unexpected movement of the
vehicle.
Warning!
Vehicles with four-wheel drive must never be
The increased control that is provided should
tested on a two-wheel dynamometer.
not induce you to take greater risks with
your safety. The limits dictated by the laws Advise the emission station of this warning
of physics cannot be overcome, even with before testing the vehicle.
four-wheel drive. The risk of accidents due
to inappropriate speed cannot be reduced,
even by four-wheel drive. The driver bears the
responsibility for all driving maneuvers.
Power measurement
Power measurements on dynamometers are not
Adapt your driving style to the prevailing road
approved by Porsche.
and weather conditions.

66 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Brake tests
Brake tests must be performed only on plate-type
test stands or roller test stands.
The following limit values must not be exceeded on
roller test stands:
– Testing speed 5 mph (8 km/h)
– Test duration 20 seconds

Handbrake tests
Handbrake tests on the roller test stand must be
performed only with the ignition switched off.

Balancing wheels on the vehicle

During finish balancing of the wheels, the vehicle
must be hoisted and all the wheels able to rotate
freely.

Towing
Please observe the chapter ”TOWING” on page
321.

Controls, Instruments 67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Retractable Rear Spoiler Automatic mode
Warning!
Function of the retractable rear spoiler Risk of damage from pushing the vehicle by Conditions
The rear spoiler improves driving stability, especial- the spoiler. The limits for automatic extension and retraction of
ly at higher speeds. the spoiler depend on various circumstances (e.g.
Do not push the vehicle at the spoiler.
driving speed, engine compartment temperature).
Warning! If automatic control fails, a warning message is
displayed by the on-board computer.
Risk of accident. If the rear spoiler cannot be
extended, driving stability will be adversely
Engine compartment temperature under
affected by increased rear axle lift, which
could lead to loss of control.
122 °F/55 °C
Spoiler extends at 75 mph/120 km/h and retracts
Adapt your driving style and speed to the
at 37 mph/60 km/h.
changed driving behavior.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Engine compartment temperature over
Porsche dealer. 140 °F/60 °C
Spoiler extends at 50 mph/80 km/h and retracts
at 19 mph/30 km/h.
Warning!
Risk of injury during manual retraction or
extension of the rear spoiler with the vehicle
stationary.
Make sure that no persons or objects are
within the range of movement of the rear
spoiler.

68 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Retracting a manually extended rear spoiler
at speeds between 0 and 20 mph (0 and
30 km/h): Press and hold button until the
rear spoiler has reached its final position. The
light-emitting diode in the button goes out. The
rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.
at speeds between 20 and 60 mph (30
and 100 km/h): Press button briefly. The
rear spoiler retracts, the light-emitting diode in
the button goes out. The rear spoiler changes
to automatic mode.
at speeds over 60 mph (100 km/h): Press
button briefly. The rear spoiler remains
extended, the light-emitting diode in the
button goes out. The rear spoiler changes
to automatic mode.

Manual control

Manual extending and retracting

When the ignition is on, the rear spoiler can be
extended and retracted manually using the button
in the center console.

Extending
Press button briefly. The spoiler extends to its
final position. The light-emitting diode in the
button lights up.

Controls, Instruments 69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Clutch Pedal Should the free travel of the clutch pedal suddenly
become larger, it could mean a malfunction of the
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully clutch.
before the starter will engage.
See your Porsche dealer for correction.

Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
Always check the movement of the clutch
pedal before driving and make sure that it is
not obstructed by a floor mat or any other
object.
Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle. Your Porsche dealer
will be glad to offer you nonskid floor mats of
the correct size.

Warning!
To avoid damage to the clutch and transmis-
sion:
Always depress the clutch pedal fully when
changing gears.
Do not hold the car on a steep grade with the
clutch pedal partially depressed.

70 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting the parking brake Warning lights
Pull the lever all the way up (arrow). With the Parking brake warning light USA
ignition on, the parking brake warning lights in
the instrument panel and on-board computer
Parking brake warning light Canada
will come on if the lever is even slightly raised.
A firm pull upward is required to properly
engage the parking brake. If the brake is not The warning lights in the instrument panel and
fully set, the vehicle may roll without control. on-board computer will go out after the parking
brake is fully released. The warning lights are not
Move the selector lever to “P” (Tiptronic) or an indicator that the parking brake is fully set; it
move the gearshift lever to reverse or first is only intended to be a warning to release the
gear (Manual transmission). parking brake before driving the car.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully set and the vehicle is not Caution!
moving at all.
A partially engaged brake will overheat the
rear brakes, reduce their effectiveness and
Danger! cause excessive wear.
Parking Brake Risk of serious personal injury or death. A Release the parking brake fully.
partially engaged parking brake may allow
Function of the parking brake the vehicle to roll, causing serious personal
injury or death to any person in its path. When parking your car, always set the parking
Parking brake force is mechanically transferred to
the rear wheels by means of cables. brake by pulling all the way up on the lever.
Engage the parking brake fully.
Use the parking brake only after the vehicle Move the selector lever to “P” (Tiptronic) or
has come to a full stop. move the gearshift lever to reverse or first
gear (Manual transmission).
Releasing the parking brake
On hills also turn the front wheels towards the
Pull the lever slightly up as you depress the curb.
release button, and then push the lever all the
way down.

Controls, Instruments 71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Brakes Brake system function If the warning lights in the instrument panel and
on-board computer go on while driving, the brake
Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted
General information hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disc
fluid level may be too low, or (if the brake pedal
travel has increased) one of the two brake circuits
Make it a habit to check the operation of your brakes at the front and rear. Both circuits function
may have failed.
brakes before driving. independently. One brake circuit operates the front
and the other operates the rear. A greater braking pressure will be required,
Keep in mind that the braking distance increases
stopping distances will be longer and the braking
very rapidly as the speed increases. At 60 mph If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still
behavior will change, particularly in curves.
or 100 km/h, for example, it is not twice but four operate. However, you will notice an increased
times longer than 30 mph or 50 km/h. Tire traction pedal travel when you apply the brakes. Failure of With correctly adjusted brakes, and a correctly
is also less effective when the roads are wet or one brake circuit will cause the stopping distance working brake system, the pedal travel to the
slippery. to increase. point of brake actuation should be 1-3/16 in. to
1-9/16 in. or 30 mm to 40 mm. Whenever the
Therefore, always maintain a safe distance
Warning! brake pedal travel exceeds this distance, have the
from the car in front of you.
brake system checked.
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
Vehicles without Porsche Ceramic personal injury or death. In the unlikely event
Brake pedal
Composite Brake (PCCB) of hydraulic failure of one brake circuit:

Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed Push the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in Warning!
grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to that position. A mechanical linkage activates
corrode if your car is parked for an extended the second circuit, and you will be able to bring Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
period. The brakes will tend to “rub” as a result. the vehicle to a stop. personal injury or death. Any obstruction of
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion depend the brake pedal could increase the stopping
After bringing your vehicle to a complete stop, distance.
on the amount of time the vehicle was parked, avoid driving the vehicle and instead have
whether granular or liquid road salt was spread it towed to the nearest authorized Porsche Always check the movement of the brake
and whether grease-dissolving agents were used dealer for repair. pedal before driving and make sure that it is
in car washes. If the braking comfort is noticeably not obstructed by a floor mat or any other
impaired, we recommend having the brake system object.
checked by experts at an authorized Porsche Brake warning light USA
dealer.
Brake warning light Canada

72 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding When the car is moving while the engine is not Warning light USA
into positions that could interfere with the safe running, or if the brake booster is defective, more
operation of your vehicle. Your Porsche dealer pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring
Warning light Canada
will be glad to offer you nonskid floor mats of the car to a stop. If this happens, ABS and PSM will
the correct size. also not operate.
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and
Moisture or road salt on brakes affects braking. on-board computer stay on when the engine is
Note When the vehicle is driven on salted roads for running or come on while driving, the brake pads
extended periods, the brakes should be washed are worn, excessively.
In case one of the two brake circuits fails,
down thoroughly about every 2 weeks. An auto-
increased pedal travel is required to bring your Do not continue to operate the vehicle. Have
matic carwash facility cannot do this job properly.
vehicle to a full stop. your authorized Porsche dealer inspect or
Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake applica-
tions. replace the brake pads.
Warning!
To avoid overheating and premature wear of Warning!
the brakes: Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
Before descending a steep grade, reduce personal injury or death. Driving through
speed and shift the transmission into a lower water may reduce traction. Moisture on
gear or driving position to control speed. brakes from road water, car wash, or coating
of road salt may affect braking efciency.
Do not “ride the brakes” by resting your foot
on the pedal when not intending to apply brake Cautiously apply brakes to test brakes after
pressure. being exposed.
Do not hold the pedal down too long or too
often. This could cause the brakes to get hot
and not function properly. Brake wear
Your car has excellent brakes, but they are still
subject to wear. The rate at which they wear
Brake booster depends on how the brakes are used.
The brake booster assists braking only when Have the brake system inspected at the
the engine is running. intervals recommended in your Maintenance
Booklet.

Controls, Instruments 73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Brake pads
Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends
to a great extent on the driving style and the condi-
tions of use and therefore cannot be expressed in
actual miles on the road.
The high-performance brake system is designed
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and
temperatures. Certain speeds, braking forces
and ambient conditions (such as temperature and
humidity) therefore might cause “brake noises”.

New brake pads or linings

New brake pads and brake discs have to be
“broken in”, and therefore only attain optimal
friction when the car has covered several hundred
miles or km. The slightly reduced braking ability
must be compensated for by pressing the brake
pedal harder. This also applies whenever the brake
pads and brake discs are replaced.

74 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ABS Brake System Operation of the ABS system
Warning!
A wheel speed sensor is mounted to each of the
(Antilock Brake System) The increased control that is provided should four wheels. If wheel lock-up of either of the front
The ABS system represents a major contribution to not induce you to take greater risks with wheels or the rear wheels is sensed during braking,
the enhancement of active safety in your vehicle. your safety. The limits dictated by the laws of the brake pressure is adjusted automatically until
This system prevents the wheels from locking in a physics cannot be overcome, even with ABS. the wheel no longer slips.
panic stop on almost all road surfaces. The risk of accidents due to inappropriate
speed cannot be reduced, even by the ABS. If braking forces approach the wheel lock-up point
The driver bears the responsibility for all for all wheels (panic braking) the ABS system will
With the ABS system in your vehicle, the intervene to provide a rapid rythmic braking. The
driving maneuvers.
following areas are enhanced: proper operation of ABS is perceived by the driver
Adapt your driving style to the prevailing road as a pulsating brake pedal in conjunction with
Steering, vehicle remains steerable under all
and weather conditions. audible noise and perhaps some vibration.
braking forces when ABS is engaged.
Obey all traffic laws. If you experience these sensations while
Good directional control, no swerving caused by
driving or a road surface with questionable
locking of wheels under braking conditions.
traction, reduce vehicle speed appropriate for
Shorter stopping distance, stopping distances the prevailing road conditions.
Warning!
are usually reduced because controlled braking is
If full braking should be necessary, press the
maximized. Other vehicles not equipped with the ABS
brake pedal all the way down throughout the
system may not be able to maintain control,
Prevention of wheel lock up, no brake- induced entire braking procedure, regardless of the
especially on wet or poor road surfaces and
sliding and thus no localized tire wear from pulsating pedal. Do not ease up on pressure
thus may be more likely to impact you from
emergency braking. applied to the pedal.
behind.
The crucial advantage of the ABS system over The functional readiness of all the main electrical
a conventional brake system is in the area of To minimize that risk, use your ABS system components of the ABS is checked by an electronic
maintaining directional control and maneuverability to increase your ability to maneuver to avoid monitoring system both before and while you drive.
of the car in emergency situations. dangerous situations and not merely to try to
stop in the shortest distance possible. Warning light USA

Warning light Canada

When the ignition is switched on the ABS warning

light will light up while the system is electronically

Controls, Instruments 75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 interrogated and goes out when the engine is
started if the check is not yet complete. If the
ABS warning lamp fails to go out, this indicates
that ABS has been deactivated due to a fault. If
the warning lights in the instrument panel and
on-board computer light up while you are driving,
this indicates that a fault has occurred. In both
cases, normal braking, as in vehicles without ABS,
is still retained.
The ABS system should, however, be examined
at an authorized Porsche dealer immediately to
prevent the occurrence of further faults.
If the ABS system becomes inoperative, take
your vehicle to your authorized Porsche dealer
immediately.

Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death. The control unit
of the ABS brake system is set for standard
tire size. If non-standard tires are installed,
the control unit may misinterpret the speed
of the vehicle, because of the variant data it
receives from the sensors on the axles.
Use only tire makes and types tested by
Porsche.

76 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To do so press the PASM button C. The
light-emitting diode in the PASM button goes
out.
Please observe the chapter ”SPORT MODE” on
page 78.
Please observe the chapter ”PORSCHE
ACTIVE SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT (PASM)”
on page 82.

Sports Exhaust System Sports exhaust system for vehicles with

sports mode
Sports exhaust system for
vehicles without sports mode The sport exhaust system can be switched on and
off when the ignition is on using the SPORT button
The sports exhaust system can be switched on and B.
off when the ignition is switched on using button A.
Switching on the sports mode actuates the
When the sports exhaust system is switched on,
markedly sporty PASM shock-absorber tuning.
the light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
However, should you wish to have a more com-
fortable shock absorber setting, but still use the
characteristics of the sport mode and the sport
exhaust system, the PASM can be switched to Nor-
mal mode separately.

Controls, Instruments 77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sport Mode
Function
A sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport mode
is switched on. Interventions by the Porsche
control systems are intentionally shifted towards
greater agility and driving performance.
– PASM (Porsche Active Suspension
Management) is automatically changed
to Sport mode, resulting in a stiffer suspension
setup.
– The Tiptronic S switches to a sporty gear-
changing map and shortens the gear shifting
periods. Gear changes take place faster.
– PSM (Porsche Stability Management) control is
sporty. PSM interventions take place later than
in Normal mode. The driver can maneuver the performance limits are reached (only in manual When Sport mode is switched on, the logo SPORT
vehicle with greater agility at its performance selection mode for vehicles with Tiptronic S). appears next to the digital speedometer.
limits, without having to dispense with the
assistance of PSM in emergency situations. Please observe the appropriate chapters PSM, Switching Sport mode on and off simultaneously
This helps to achieve optimal lap times, PASM and Tiptronic S. activates and deactivates the Sport mode of
particularly on race circuits with a dry road the PASM. If the Sport mode of the PASM was
surface. Switching Sport mode on and off activated with the PASM button, it will remain on.

– The electronic accelerator pedal reacts Press SPORT button in the center console. After the ignition is switched off, Sport mode is
sooner, and the engine is more responsive to When Sport mode is switched on, the light- automatically reset to Normal mode.
throttle inputs. When Sport mode is switched emitting diode in the SPORT button is lit.
on, this function is activated only after the
driver has briefly released the accelerator
pedal.
– The rpm limiter characteristic is “harder”, i.e.
the engine is immediately throttled when the

78 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Porsche Stability Management – The system compensates for undesired vehi- deviates from the desired course (steering-wheel
cle reactions (Ferraria effect) when the driver position): It brakes individual wheels as needed. In
(PSM) releases the accelerator pedal or brakes on addition, the engine power may be manipulated in
bends. This compensation functions up to the order to stabilize the vehicle.
General information regarding PSM maximum lateral acceleration.
The events below inform the driver of PSM control
PSM is an active control system for stabilization – PSM actively stabilizes the vehicle during operations and warn him to adapt her/his driving
of the vehicle during extreme driving manoeuvres. dynamic driving maneuvers (e.g. rapid style to the road conditions:
The most recent version of PSM (only on vehicles steering movements, during lane changes
with four-wheel drive) improves the brake system – The multi-functional information light on the
or on alternating curves).
functionality. instrument panel flashes.
– Improved braking stability in curves and on
– Hydraulic noises can be heard.
different or varying road surfaces.
Warning! – The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel
– It improves the braking functions and shortens
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious forces are altered as the PSM controls the
the stopping distance if emergency braking is
personal injury or death. The increased brakes.
needed (only vehicles with four-wheel drive).
control that is provided should not induce – Reduced engine power.
you to take greater risks with your safety. The
limits dictated by the laws of physics cannot
Readiness for operation – The brake pedal pulsates and its position is
be overcome, even with PSM. The risk of PSM is switched on automatically every time you changed during braking. In order to achieve
accidents due to inappropriate speed cannot start the engine. full vehicle deceleration, foot pressure must be
be reduced, even by PSM. The driver bears increased after beginning of the brake pedal
the responsibility for all driving maneuvers. Function pulsing.

Adapt your driving style to the prevailing road Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system Examples of PSM control operations
and weather conditions. and engine continuously measure:
– If the front wheels of the vehicle drift on a bend,
Obey all traffic laws. – Speed the rear wheel on the inside of the bend is
– Direction of travel (steering angle) braked and the engine power is reduced if
necessary.
– Lateral acceleration
Advantages of PSM – Rate of turn about the vertical axis
– If the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend,
the front wheel on the outside of the bend is
– Superior traction and lane-holding ability in all
PSM uses these values to determine the direction braked.
driving situations - even on road surfaces with
of travel desired by the driver. PSM intervenes and
varying friction.
corrects the course if the actual direction of motion

Controls, Instruments 79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Additional functions for vehicles with The following functions stabilize the vehicle in
four-wheel drive emergency situations, even with PSM switched off:

– Pre-filling the brake system: If you suddenly – When PSM is off, the vehicle is stabilized as
and quickly take your foot off the accelerator soon as one of the two front wheels enters the
pedal, the brake system gets prepared for ABS control range.
possible emergency braking. The brake – When PSM is off and Sport mode is on, the
system is pre-filled which lightly presses the vehicle is stabilized as soon as both front
brake pads on the brake discs. wheels enter the ABS control range.
Brake boost: If emergency braking does not One-sided spinning of the wheels is prevented,
have sufficient pedal pressure, the brake boost even with PSM switched off.
produces the brake pressure necessary for
maximum deceleration on all 4 wheels. Switching PSM back on
The PSM should always be switched on Press PSM OFF button. PSM is switched on
after a short delay. The light-emitting diode
during “normal” driving. in the button and the multifunctional PSM
However, it may be advantageous to switch off light go out. The on-board computer shows a
PSM temporarily in exceptional situations, for Switching off PSM message.
example:
Press PSM OFF button. PSM is switched off
– On a loose surface or in deep snow, Sport mode
after a short delay. The light-emitting diode
– When “rocking the vehicle free” and in the button is illuminated. When the PSM is A sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport mode
switched off, the multifunctional PSM light on is switched on. PSM interventions are later than in
– When using snow chains. the instrument panel is lit and a message is Normal mode; the vehicle can be maneuvered with
shown by the on-board computer. An acoustic greater agility at its performance limits, without
signal also sounds. the need to dispense with the assistance of PSM
in emergency situations. This helps to achieve
Vehicles with four-wheel drive optimal lap times, particularly on race circuits and
a dry road surface.
When PSM is switched off, the additional braking
functions are deactivated. The automatic reactiva-
tion in emergency situations is coupled to the PSM
control in emergency situations.

80 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Multifunctional PSM light Checks on test stands

– The multifunctional light on the instrument Brake tests

panel lights up for a lamp check when the Brake tests must be performed only on plate-type
ignition is switched on. test stands or roller test stands.
– The light indicates a control operation by The following limit values must not be exceeded on
flashing, including when PSM is switched off roller test stands:
(brake control in the event of one-sided wheel
spin). – Testing speed 5 mph (8 km/h)

– In conjunction with a message on the on-board – Test duration 20 seconds

computer, the light indicates that PSM is
switched off. An acoustic signal also sounds. Handbrake tests
– Faults are displayed by the light in conjunction Handbrake tests on the roller test stand must be
with a message on the on-board computer. performed only with the ignition switched off.
PSM is out of order.
Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Please observe the chapter ”PUTTING
VEHICLE INTO OPERATION” on page 297.
Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS
ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE
ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143.

Towing
Please observe the chapter ”TOWING” on page
321.

Controls, Instruments 81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Porsche Active Suspension Please observe the chapter ”SPORTS
EXHAUST SYSTEM” on page 77.
Management (PASM)
Function
PASM makes two running-gear setups available to
the driver: “Normal” and “Sport”. The selection is
made via a button on the center console.
In Normal mode the running gear is in a sporty and
comfortable setup. Sport mode offers a markedly
sporty shock absorber tuning (e.g. for driving on
the race circuit).
The variable suspension system selects the appro-
priate damping level for each wheel according to
the situation and conditions of driving.
Example: If the vehicle is driven in a markedly
sporty manner in Normal mode, PASM automat-
ically adapts the shock-absorber behavior to the Switching on PASM Sport mode
driving situation in this case as well. Press PASM button in the center console.
When PASM Sport mode is switched on, the
light-emitting diode in the button is illuminated
and a message is shown by the on-board
computer.

Switching off PASM Sport mode

Press PASM button in the center console. The
light-emitting diode in the button goes out and
the on-board computer displays a message.
After the ignition is switched off, PASM is automati-
cally reset to Normal mode.

82 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For vehicles with automatic anti-dazzle Interior lights, reading lights
mirrors
Switching off
Switch off the automatic anti-dazzle operation
of the mirrors before you switch on the interior Press left half of switch.
light. Otherwise the mirrors may accidentally
swivel into the anti-dazzle position. Switching to continuous illumination
Press right half of switch.

Switching on and off automatically

Move switch to center position.
The interior and footwell lights are switched on
when a door is unlocked or opened or when the
ignition key is withdrawn from the ignition lock.
The lights are switched off with a delay of approx.
2 minutes after the doors are closed. The light
A,C - Switch for reading light on driver/passenger goes out immediately as soon as the ignition is
side switched on or the vehicle is locked.
B - Switch for interior light and footwell lights
D - Orientation light Orientation light
A light-emitting diode at the bottom of the interior
Interior Lights mirror improves orientation in the passenger
compartment when it is dark.
Automatic disconnection Note on operation
Please observe the chapter ”LOAD SWITCH- On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on page the brightness of the orientation light can be
293. changed in PCM.
Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.

Controls, Instruments 83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation, Instruments 19. Buttons for rear spoiler, Porsche Active
Suspension Management (PASM), Sport
Overview of the functions mode, Porsche Stability Management (PSM),
Sports exhaust system
1. Ignition lock/steering lock
2. Turn signals/high beam/headlight flasher stalk
3. Hands-free microphone for telephone
4. Horn
5. Wiper/washer stalk, rear window wiper
6. Button for seat heating, left
7. Interior temperature sensor/GPS antenna
8. Stopwatch
9. Emergency flasher switch
10. Central locking button, readiness display for
alarm system
11. Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
12. Button for seat heating, right
13. Cupholder
14. Light switch
15. Operating lever for on-board computer
16. Locking lever for steering-wheel adjustment
17. Operating lever for automatic speed control
18. Operating panel for air conditioning

84 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Controls, Instruments 85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Please observe the chapter ”IMMOBILIZER” on Switch position 0
page 22.
Please observe the chapter ”KEY WITH RADIO
Initial position
REMOTE CONTROL” on page 23. The ignition key cannot be withdrawn when the
ignition is switched on or when the engine has been
Before starting the engine started.
Apply the footbrake. To withdraw the ignition key:
Manual transmission: Move the gearshift Stop the vehicle.
lever into neutral. The clutch pedal must On vehicles with Tiptronic S: Move selector
be depressed fully before the starter will lever to position P.
engage.
Switch ignition off.
Tiptronic: Move the selector lever to P or N.
Remove ignition key.

0 - Initial position
1 - Ignition on
2 - Start engine
3 - Ignition off

Ignition/Starter Switch with

anti-theft Steering Lock
Switch positions
The ignition lock has a total of four ignition lock
positions. The ignition key rebounds to the initial
position from every ignition lock position.
For your safety, fasten safety belts.

86 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Switch position 1 Switch position 2 Switch position 3
Ignition on Start engine Ignition off
Turn ignition key to position 1. Ignition is Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2. Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 3.
switched on.
Please observe the chapter ”STARTING AND
Note on operation STOPPING ENGINE” on page 89.
All electrical equipment can be switched on.
Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS
ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE
ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143.

Controls, Instruments 87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Locking the steering column Gong
If you leave the key in the ignition/steering lock, a
Automatic locking gong will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
The steering column is automatically locked when This is a reminder to remove the key.
the ignition key is withdrawn from the ignition lock.

Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death. The steering wheel
will lock and will cause loss of steering.
Never remove key from the ignition lock or turn
the key off while the vehicle is moving.
Always withdraw the ignition key when
leaving the vehicle.

Automatic unlocking
The steering column is automatically unlocked
when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition
lock.
Note
To avoid battery run-down, always remove the
ignition key from the ignition lock.
Please observe the chapter ”BATTERY” on
page 295.

88 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Starting and Stopping Engine Starting the engine
Danger!
Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
Starting Procedures Engine exhaust fumes have many compo-
As soon as the engine starts, release the nents which you can smell. They also contain
Please observe the chapter ”IMMOBILIZER” on ignition key.
page 22. carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
The first operation of the starter is ended automat- and odorless gas. Carbon monoxide can
Please observe the chapter ”EMISSION ically when the engine starts. If the engine does cause unconsciousness and even death if
CONTROL SYSTEM” on page 247. not start, subsequent starter operations will not be inhaled.
ended automatically.
Never start or let the engine run in an
Danger!
If the engine fails to start after 10 seconds or enclosed, unventilated area. It is not rec-
Serious personal injury or death may result if 15 seconds of cranking: ommended to sit in your car for prolonged
you are involved in a collision without having Wait about 10 seconds before engaging the periods with the engine on and the car not
fastened the safety belts. starter again. moving.
Fasten safety belts before driving away. When starting the engine, be ready to drive
immediately. Drive vehicle at moderate
speeds and avoid engine speeds above Danger!
4,200 rpm during the first 5 minutes. An unattended vehicle with a running engine
Before starting the engine
Do not let the engine idle to warm up. is potentially hazardous. If warning lights
Apply the footbrake. should come on to indicate improper opera-
Manual transmission: Move the gearshift tion, they would go unnoticed.
lever into neutral. The clutch pedal must Never leave the engine idling unattended.
be depressed fully before the starter will
engage.
Tiptronic: Move the selector lever to P or N. Danger!
Temperature sensors on the engine automatically Danger of re.
provide the correct fuel/air mixture required
for starting. Therefore, it is not necessary to Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
depress the accelerator pedal while starting a where the hot exhaust system may come in
cold or a warm engine. contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
other flammable material.

Controls, Instruments 89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
the fire department. Do not endanger your life Warning! Warning!
by attempting to put out the fire. Danger of injury. Hot engine compartment Risk of injury. The radiator fans in the front
components can burn skin on contact. end of the car may be operating or unex-
pectedly start operating when the engine is
Before working on any part in the engine
switched on.
Stopping engine compartment, turn the engine off and let it
cool down sufficiently. Carry out work in these areas only with the
Turn key back to position 3.
engine switched off.
Do not stop engine immediately after hard
or extended driving. Keep engine running
at increased idle for about two minutes to Engine-compartment blower, radiator fan
prevent excessive heat build-up before turning The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of the
Automatic garage door
off engine. car. The engine-compartment blower is mounted The ignition system in your Porsche may interfere
To avoid battery run-down, always remove the on the engine compartment lid. with your electronically operated garage door.
ignition key from the ignition lock. To check this, drive your Porsche close to the
Make sure that when you leave the car, even Warning! garage door. Make sure not to interfere with
briefly, you have withdrawn the ignition key. the operating range of the door.
Risk of injury. After the engine is switched
Engage the steering lock by moving the off, the engine-compartment temperature Run the engine at different speeds.
steering wheel to the left or right. Turn is monitored for approx. 30 minutes. During
If the garage door opens or closes without you
the steering wheel to the locking position this period, and depending on temperature,
operating the garage door unit in your car, contact
before you switch off the engine so that you the engine-compartment blower may contin-
the dealer who installed the automatic garage door
don’t have to exert yourself when locking or ue to run or start to run.
to have the frequency and/or coding of the garage
unlocking the steering. door signal changed or modified.
Carry out work in these areas only with the
engine off, the ignition off, and exercise
extreme caution.

90 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument Panel USA Models 19. On-board computer display
20. Porsche Stability Management: Multifunctional
Overview PSM light
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in 21. Brake warning light
the Owner’s Manual.
22. Safety belt warning light
1. Engine oil temperature gauge
23. Tiptronic indicator
2. Speedometer with analogue display
24. Clock and outside temperature display
3. Tire pressure warning light
25. Adjustment button for clock
4. Turn signal indicator light, left
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
5. Tachometer lights light up for a lamp check.
6. High beam indicator light Note
7. Turn signal indicator light, right Warnings that have been given are stored in the
8. ABS warning light appropriate control unit memory and can be read
out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
9. Cooling system: Temperature gauge, warning
light This information can help to warn you about
situations which may be hazardous to you or your
10. Fuel: Level gauge, warning light
car.
11. Engine oil pressure gauge
Note
12. Adjustment button for instrument illumination
Warnings that have been given are stored in the
and trip counter
appropriate control unit memory and can be read
13. Odometer and daily trip mileage display out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
14. Automatic speed control indicator light This information can help to warn you about
15. Light sensor for instrument illumination situations which may be hazardous to you or your
car.
16. Airbag warning light
17. Emission control warning light (Check Engine)
18. Central warning light

Controls, Instruments 91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 92 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument Panel Canada Models 19. On-board computer display
20. Porsche Stability Management: Multifunctional
Overview PSM light
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in 21. Brake warning light
the Owner’s Manual.
22. Safety belt warning light
1. Engine oil temperature gauge
23. Tiptronic indicator
2. Speedometer with analogue display
24. Clock and outside temperature display
3. Tire pressure warning light
25. Adjustment button for clock
4. Turn signal indicator light, left
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
5. Tachometer lights light up for a lamp check.
6. High beam indicator light Note
7. Turn signal indicator light, right Warnings that have been given are stored in the
8. ABS warning light appropriate control unit memory and can be read
out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
9. Cooling system: Temperature gauge, warning
light This information can help to warn you about
situations which may be hazardous to you or your
10. Fuel: Level gauge, warning light
car.
11. Engine oil pressure gauge
Note
12. Adjustment button for instrument illumination
Warnings that have been given are stored in the
and trip counter
appropriate control unit memory and can be read
13. Odometer and daily trip mileage display out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
14. Automatic speed control indicator light This information can help to warn you about
15. Light sensor for instrument illumination situations which may be hazardous to you or your
car.
16. Airbag warning light
17. Emission control warning light (Check Engine)
18. Central warning light

Controls, Instruments 93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 94 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine oil temperature

Indication
The engine oil temperature is indicated in the left
instrument.

Controls, Instruments 95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Adjustment button for instrument illumina-
tion and trip counter

Automatic Speed Control

Indicator light
Indication
Indicates automatic speed control readiness.

96 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument Illumination
Function
The illumination is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness by the light sensor in the
tachometer.
In addition, when the car lights are switched on, the
instrument and switch symbol brightness can be
manually adjusted.

Warning!
Risk of loss of control or an accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.

Dimming instrument illumination

Note Turn adjustment button A in the appropriate
When the car lights are switched on, the instrument direction and hold it until the desired bright-
lighting for light dials switches on and off automati- ness has been reached.
cally depending on the ambient brightness. The chosen level of brightness is indicated by
a bar display in the display field of the on-board
computer.

Controls, Instruments 97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reset the distance in the “SET” menu of the
on-board computer.
Please observe the chapter ”SET BASIC
SETTING ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page
139.
After exceeding 6,213 miles or 9,999 kilometers,
the counter returns to “0”.

Trip Odometer
Resetting to zero

Warning!
Risk of loss of control or an accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.

Press adjustment button A for approximately

one second or

98 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Speedometer Please observe the chapter ”SET BASIC
SETTING ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page
Indication 139.
The digital speedometer is integrated in the
on-board computer. The indication changes from
mph to km/h when the units are changed from
miles to kilometers.

Changing over between Miles / Kilometers

The units of the distance and speed displays can
be changed in the “SET” menu of the on-board
computer.

Controls, Instruments 99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Turn Signal Indicator Light
Caution!
To avoid severe engine damage. Indication
Always observe the engine rpm before Flashes in synchronism with the turn signals.
down-shifting to a lower gear, so you do not
exceed the maximum engine rpm. Left arrow - left turn signals
Right arrow - right turn signals
If the frequency of the display becomes
noticeably faster, check the operation of the
turn signals.

High Beam

Indicator light
Lights when high beam or headlight flasher is
switched on. The indicator light goes out when the
Tachometer high beams are switched off.

Indication
The tachometer shows the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). The beginning of
the red marks at the right end of the scale indicates
the maximum permissible engine rpm. A speed
limiter prevents the engine from being overrevved
during acceleration. Before reaching this area, the
next higher gear should be selected. Shift to the
next lower gear when the engine rpm drops below
1,500 rpm.

100 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 is high, but should return to “normal” when engine Please observe the chapter ”COOLANT
load is reduced. LEVEL” on page 233.

Warning light “A” Caution!

If the coolant temperature is too high, the Risk of engine damage.
warning light comes on. Additionally, a warning
is displayed in the on-board computer. If the warning lights come on even though
coolant level is correct, do not continue
Pull off the road, turn off the engine and allow
driving.
to cool.
Have the fault remedied at the nearest
Check radiator and air passages in front end of
authorized Porsche dealer.
car for obstructions.
Check coolant level. If necessary, add coolant
and have fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer. Engine compartment blower fan
Please observe the chapter ”COOLANT In addition, this warning light ashes to indicate a
LEVEL” on page 233. fault in the engine compartment blower fan.
Cooling System Have the cause of the fault remedied at an
Note
authorized Porsche dealer.
To prevent excessive temperatures, the cooling-air
Temperature gauge (ignition on) passages must not be restricted by coverings (e.g.
USA: Display in F films, “stone guards”).
Canada: Display in C
If the coolant level is too low, the warning light
Pointer to the left - engine cold ashes. Additionally, a warning is displayed in the
Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine on-board computer.
loading. Switch engine off and allow to cool.
Pointer in the middle - normal operating temper- Add coolant.
ature
Have the cause of the fault remedied at an
The pointer may move up to the red area when authorized Porsche dealer.
engine is heavily loaded and outside temperature

Controls, Instruments 101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 – The warning “Selector lever not engaged”
appears on the display of the on-board
computer.
Engage the selector lever correctly.

If there is a fault in the transmission:

– The 4th gear display flashes.
– The warning “Tiptronic emergency run”
appears on the on-board computer.
Please observe the chapter ”REDUCED
DRIVING PROGRAM” on page 198.
Have the fault repaired immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Please observe the chapter ”TIPTRONIC S” on
page 193.
Tiptronic
Indicator for selector lever position and
engaged gear
When the engine is running, the selector lever
position and engaged gear are indicated.

If the selector lever is between two

positions:
– The corresponding selector lever position in
the instrument cluster flashes and

102 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 fuel accurately. The ”remaining range“ readout will
also be incorrect.

Warning light “A”

When the engine is running, the warning light
of the level gauge lights up if less than approx.
2.6 U.S.gallons (10 liters) of fuel remains in the
tank. Additionally, a warning is displayed in the
on-board computer.
Fill up at the next opportunity.

Caution!
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine.
Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.

Fuel Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning

lights have come on.

Level gauge
Please observe the chapter ”EMISSION
When the ignition is on the fuel level is displayed. CONTROL SYSTEM” on page 247.
Please observe the chapter ”CAPACITIES” on If the level gauge warning light ashes, there
page 335. has been a system fault. Additionally, a warning is
If the vehicle’s inclination changes (e.g. going up displayed in the on-board computer. There will then
or downhill), minor deviations in the indication may be no reserve warning.
occur. To remedy the fault, go to an authorized
Note Porsche dealer.
If a small quantity of fuel is added to a nearly empty
fuel tank, the fuel gauge cannot measure the added

Controls, Instruments 103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting the time Press adjustment button again.
When adjustment mode is deliberately left by
Precondition pressing the button, the time begins precisely
to the second.
Warning!
Note
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting in
serious personal injury or death. The time mode can be changed between 12 h and
24 h in the on-board computer.
Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving. Outside temperature
The outside temperature display C does not
Switch ignition on. indicate, if ice is on the road. Even if a temperature
above 32°F (0°C ) is displayed, ice may still form
Setting hours on the road, for instance on bridges or when the
road passes through a heavily shaded area.
Press adjustment button A for about one
second. Hour display flashes.
A - Adjustment button for clock Turn button in the appropriate direction:
B - Clock
C - Outside temperature display to right - increase hours figure
to left - decrease hours figure.
Adjustment in hours - turn button briefly
Clock Fast adjustment (display cycles) - turn and hold
button.
Automatic switching off
The clock is blanked out approximately four Setting minutes
minutes after the ignition is switched off or when Press adjustment button again. Minutes
the car is locked. display flashes.
Set by rotating as in hours mode.

Leaving adjustment mode

Automatically after one minute or:

104 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Please observe the chapter ”OIL DISPLAY AND
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
on page 136.
Please observe the chapter ”ENGINE OIL
LEVEL” on page 236.
Add engine oil if necessary.

Caution!
Risk of engine damage.
Do not continue driving if there is an obvious oil
leak.
Do not continue driving if the warning lights
come on even though oil level is correct.
Have the fault remedied at the nearest
authorized Porsche dealer.
Engine Oil Pressure

Indication
With the engine warmed up and running at a speed
of 5000 rpm, the engine oil pressure should be
approx. 3.5 bar or higher.
If oil pressure drops abruptly and a message
is displayed on the on-board computer when
the engine is running on or when driving:
Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Switch off the engine.
Measure the oil level using the on-board
computer.

Controls, Instruments 105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Battery

Dropping battery voltage

If the battery voltage drops abruptly, a warning
message will be displayed by the on-board
computer.
If the warning is displayed by the on-board
computer while the engine is running or while
driving:
Stop the car in a safe place and stop the
engine.
Possible causes
– Defect in the battery charging system.
– Broken drive belt.

Warning!
Risk of engine damage with resultant loss
of control and accident, leading to serious
personal injury or death. A broken drive belt
means there is no power assistance to the
steering (more effort is required to steer) and
coolant pump function will stop.
Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at the nearest
authorized Porsche dealer.

106 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Check Engine Warning Light
Caution!

The warning light in the instrument panel comes on If the Check engine light in the instrument
when the ignition is first turned on and remains on panel is ashing, severe catalytic converter
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come damage and power loss will soon occur.
on, have the bulb replaced promptly. Prolonged driving with the Check engine
light on could cause damage to the emission
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and
control system. It also could affect fuel
on-board computer come on and remain on while
economy and driveability.
driving, it suggests:
Have the fault remedied at the nearest
– a potential engine control problem and the
authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
need for system service or
– an improperly fastened tank cap or
– refueling with engine running.
Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS
ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE
ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143.
Although the vehicle is usually driveable and will not
require towing, see your dealer for service as soon
as possible.

Controls, Instruments 107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Central warning light

Warning messages in the INFO menu

The central warning light on the instrument panel
lights up if there are warning messages in the INFO
menu.
The messages can be called in the on-board
computer INFO menu:
Please observe the chapter ”INFO WARNING
MESSAGES” on page 116.

108 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Brake Warning Light
Indication
Brake warning light USA

Brake warning light Canada

The warning light on the instrument panel lights up:

– if the handbrake is on,
– if the brake fluid level is low,
– if the brake pads have reached the wear limit,
– if the brake circuit division is defective.
Additionally, a warning is displayed by the on-board
computer.
Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS
ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE
ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143.

Controls, Instruments 109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating lever
Function
The on-board computer is operated with the lower
left lever on the steering column.

Selecting functions of the on-board computer

Push lever up 3 or down 4.

Conrming selection (Enter)

Push the lever forward 1.

Moving back one or several selection levels

Pull the lever back 2 once or several times or

Select the arrow on the on-board

computer display with the operating lever and
On-Board Computer (BC) Operation, controls
push the operating lever forward 1.
It is not possible to describe all details of the
Display eld Note
on-board computer functions in this Owner’s
The display field is beneath the tachometer. Manual. However, the examples will quickly You can always return to the basic menu by pulling
familiarize you with the operational principle and the operating lever several times.
Readiness for operation help you to navigate through the menu structure.

– With ignition switched on, You can restore the factory default settings at any
time by using the “SET” menu.
– with engine running.

110 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic setting Push operating lever down in order to page
through the menu.
– Central display: .... Radio station
The central line B of the on-board computer can be Arrow symbol
selected in the SET menu.
Push operating lever up in order to page
Calling on-board computer functions in display through the menu.
“C”
Push operating lever up or down (selection
field D must be switched off).
The following displays can be called step by step:
– Average speed (ø mph),
– Average consumption (ø mpg),

– Range on remaining fuel (mls ).

A - Digital speedometer – Tire pressure

B - Central display – Navigation information (if activated in the SET
C - Bottom display menu).
Note
Functions and display possibilities
The values “Average speed”, “Average consump-
tion” and “Daily trip mileage” can be reset to zero in
Options
the SET menu.
Note
The available items and displays in the on-board Switching selection eld “D” on or off
computer depend on the equipment of your Push operating lever forward or back.
vehicle. For this reason it is possible that some of
the items and displays shown here are not available Arrow symbol “E” for continuation
in your on-board computer.
Arrow symbol

Controls, Instruments 111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 D - Selection eld E - Continuation arrow symbols

112 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 LIMIT Acoustic warning signal for
speed limit
Function
The acoustic warning signal can be activated for
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). The signal sounds
when the preset speed is exceeded. For the signal
to sound again, the driving speed must fall below
the preset speed by at least 3 mph (5 km/h).

Switching on selection eld “D”

Push operating lever forward.

Setting the speed Push operating lever forward.

Select LIMIT with the operating lever.

Controls, Instruments 113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Option 1: Accepting current speed Option 2: Presetting speed Select “xx mph” with the operating lever.
Push operating lever forward. Select “LIMIT active” with the operating lever: Push operating lever forward.
The acoustic warning signal is activated for the not active
current speed.
Display active

If “not active”, push the operating lever

forward.

114 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Display

Push operating lever slightly up or down until

the desired speed is reached.
upwards: speed is increased
downwards: speed is decreased
Note
Holding the lever up or down for a longer period will
adjust the speed in steps of 6 mph (10 km/h).
Push operating lever forward.

Switching the acoustic warning signal off

Select “LIMIT active” with the operating lever.
Push operating lever forward.

Controls, Instruments 115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INFO Warning messages Push operating lever forward. Push operating lever forward.
Any existing warning messages can be called Push operating lever forwards or pull back-
Switching on selection eld “D” using the operating lever. You also can call warning wards. The display returns to the Info menu.
Push operating lever forward. messages which were cancelled during the trip (but
only until the next time the ignition is switched on).
Calling warning messages
Select INFO with the operating lever.

116 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TEL Telephone information Push operating lever forward. Note
You can recall phone calls, e.g. calls that arrived
Switching on selection eld “D” during your absence, via the menu item “Missed
Push operating lever forward. calls”.

Recalling telephone information

Select TEL with the operating lever.

Controls, Instruments 117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example: Selecting from the telephone Push operating lever forward. Push the operating lever forward to end the
book and calling call.
Select a person to call and push the operating
Select “Phone book” with the operating lever. lever forward. The connection is established.

118 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Incoming call
Select “Accept” or “Refuse” and push the
operating lever forward.
Note
Rejected phone calls can be recalled with the menu
item “Missed calls”.

Controls, Instruments 119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 measures the seconds. The two small pointers
measure hours and minutes. The display re-starts
at zero after 12 hours. Seconds and increments
of 1/100th of a second can be read on the digital
display. The digital display and the display in the
on-board computer can indicate up to 99 hours and
59 minutes.
The stopwatch can be swivelled both to the left and
to the right.

Stopwatch displays:
– on the stopwatch on the instrument panel,
– in the on-board computer menu CHRONO,
– on the performance display in the PCM.

Starting/stopping stopwatch
CHRONO Stopwatch All stopwatch displays are started and stopped via Starting the timing
the on-board computer menu CHRONO. Push operating lever forward. The selection
Function field is switched on.
Note on operation
You can use the stopwatch to measure time Select CHRONO with the operating lever.
intervals, e.g. on the race circuit or on work-related When you leave the CHRONO menu while the
journeys. Measured lap times can be stored and stopwatch is running, measurement will continue.
evaluated if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche The stopwatch stops after the ignition is switched
Communication Management (PCM). off. If the ignition is switched on again within
Please observe the chapter “Sport display” in approx. 4 minutes, the stopwatch will continue
the separate PCM operating instructions. to run.
The only way to reset the stopwatch to zero is by
Stopwatch on the instrument panel selecting “Reset” in the CHRONO menu.
The stopwatch has an analogue and a digital
display. The large pointer of the analogue display

120 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Push operating lever forward. Push operating lever forward. The time runs
on all stopwatch displays. The on-board
computer display changes to the “Stop
timing/Intermediate time” selection.
Note
PCM: The performance display in the “Trip/Sport
display/Begin trip” menu must be selected in order
to analyse the data in the PCM.

Controls, Instruments 121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Stopping the timing Push lever forward. The time is stopped in all Continue timing
stopwatch displays, and the on-board compu-
After time measurement is started, the on-board After timing has been stopped, the on-board
ter display changes to the “Continue/Reset”
computer display changes to the “Stop tim- computer display changes to the “Continue/Reset”
selection.
ing/Intermediate time”. selection.
The timing can be continued or reset to zero.
Select “Stop timing” with the operating lever.
Note
PCM: After timing has been stopped, a prompt
asking whether the time is to be stored appears on
the PCM.

122 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Push operating lever forward. The stopwatch Resetting the time Push operating lever forward. The display
displays continue the timing. returns to the “Start timing” selection. The
After timing has been stopped, the on-board
stopwatch displays in the instrument panel and
The on-board computer display returns to the “Stop computer display changes to the “Continue/Reset”
the on-board computer are reset to zero.
timing/Intermediate time” selection. You can stop selection.
the stopwatch or measure an intermediate time.
Select “Reset” with the operating lever.

Controls, Instruments 123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Lap
B - Intermediate time After timing has been started, the on-board compu-
ter display changes to the “Stop timing/Intermedi-
ate time” selection.
Displaying intermediate times
Several intermediate times can be displayed for a
route or for a lap on the race circuit. The interme-
diate times B are for your information. Measured
lap times A can be stored and evaluated if the
vehicle is equipped with Porsche Communication
Management (PCM).

124 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Select “Intermediate time” with the operating returns to the “Stop timing/Intermediate time” In order to start timing a new lap:
lever and push the operating lever forwards. selection.
The “New lap?” selection appears for 5 seconds
The intermediate time will be displayed for approx. You can stop the stopwatch or measure after selection of “Intermediate time”.
5 seconds. The on-board computer display then another intermediate time.
Select “New lap?” with the operating lever and
push the operating lever forwards.

Controls, Instruments 125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The new lap is displayed on the on-board computer The on-board computer display returns to the
and the PCM. Timing on the on-board computer and “Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection
on the PCM begins from zero. The stopwatch in the after a short period.
instrument panel continues to show the total time.
You can stop the stopwatch or measure
another intermediate time or a new lap.
Note
PCM: If you wish to store the lap time in the
PCM, the performance display in the “Trip/Sport
display/Begin trip” menu of the PCM must be
selected.

126 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TPC Tire Pressure Monitoring If the Tire Pressure Monitoring is defective
Caution! (e.g. defective wheel transmitter), contact
Function an authorized Porsche dealer immediately
Despite the advantages offered by the Tire and have the damage repaired. The tire
Please observe the chapter ”TIRE PRESSURES Pressure Monitoring, it is still the driver’s pressure will not be monitored by a defective
FOR COLD TIRES” on page 334. responsibility to update the corresponding Tire Pressure Monitoring.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring continuously moni- settings in the on-board computer and
maintain the pressure in the tires. Low tire Tires lose air over time without a tire defect
tors tire pressure and tire temperature on all four
pressure reduces the road safety of the vehicle being present. A tire pressure warning
wheels and warns the driver when the tire pressure
and destroys the tire and wheel. will then appear in the on-board computer
is too low.
display. Correct the tire pressure at the next
The display as well as the settings for the Tire When a flat tire has been displayed, immediate- opportunity.
Pressure Monitoring take place on the on-board ly stop in a suitable place and check the tires
for damage. If necessary, remedy the damage The Tire Pressure Monitoring gives a warning
computer. However, you must still adjust the tire
with a tire sealant. about tire damage due to natural pressure loss
pressure on the wheel.
as well as about a gradual loss of pressure
The driver is responsible for filling the tires Do not by any means continue to drive with due to foreign objects. The Tire Pressure
correctly and making the correct settings on damaged tires. Monitoring cannot warn you about tire damage
the on-board computer. Sealing the tire with tire sealant is only an that occurs suddenly (e.g. flat tire due to
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next abrupt external effects).
The Tire Pressure Monitoring offers the following
functions: authorized Porsche dealer. The maximum
permitted speed is 50 mph (80 km/h).
– Display of the actual tire pressure while the
vehicle is in motion Do not drive with tires whose tire pressure
drops again in a short period of time. In cases
– Display of the deviation from the required
of doubt, have tires checked by an authorized
pressure (refilling pressure)
Porsche dealer.
– Display of currently set tire size and type
Damaged tires must be immediately replaced
– Tire pressure warnings in two stages by an authorized Porsche dealer. Tire
repairs are not permissible under any
circumstances.

Controls, Instruments 127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Tire Pressure Monitoring takes this relationship
between tire pressure and temperature into
account.
You can read the tire pressures to be correct-
ed in this display.
The tire pressure to be corrected (refill pressure)
is indicated on the displayed wheel. Example: If
“-1.5 psi (-0.1 bar)” is displayed, 1.5 psi (0.1 bar)
must be added to this tire.
Note
The Tire pressure menu can only be called up when
the vehicle is stationary.

Calling up the “Info pressure” display

Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
Attitudes in the on-board computer Displaying the tire pressure function of the
Select “TPC” with the operating lever.
on-board computer
Tire pressure function of the on-board Push operating lever forward. The display
Push operating lever up or down until the
computer changes to the Tire pressure menu.
tire pressure function of the on-board com-
The tire pressure function of the on-board compu- puter appears. (The selection field must be Select “Info pressure” with the operating lever.
ter displays the tire pressures (actual pressure) switched off.) Push operating lever forward.
dependent on temperature in the four wheels. You
can watch the tire pressure rise as the temperature Pressure info in Tire pressure menu Note
increases while driving. This display is only for After the ignition is switched on, it can take up
In accordance with physical principles, the air
information. to approx. 1 minute before all tire pressures are
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
Under no circumstances should the tire The tire pressure increases or decreases by displayed. Dashes (“-.-”) appear instead of the tire
pressures be changed based on this display. around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18°F (10°C ) pressures.
change in temperature.

128 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire type info in Tire pressure menu Select “Info tires” with the operating lever. Push operating lever forward. The display
changes to the Tire pressure menu.
Information about the currently set tires: Push operating lever forward.
– Tire type: Summer tires, winter tires
Tire selection in the “Set” menu
– Tire size: 18, 19 inch
Push operating lever forward in order to switch
“Info tires” shows the current tire settings. on the selection field.
Select “TPC” with the operating lever.
Calling up the “Info tires” display
Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
Select “TPC” with the operating lever.
Push operating lever forward. The display
changes to the Tire pressure menu.

Controls, Instruments 129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Select “Set” with the operating lever. Push the operating lever forward. Select “Continue” and push the operating lever
forward.
Select desired tire type: summer or winter.
Push operating lever forward. A display for
confirming the selected type of tire appears.

130 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Select the appropriate tire size (18 or 19 inch) Select “Continue” and push the operating lever Setting of the tire characteristics has only been
and push operating lever forwards. A display forward. successfully completed when the message
for confirming the selected tire size appears. “Process complete” is displayed by the on-board
computer.
Note
Select arrow (Back) and push the operating
This menu is only displayed when different tire
lever forward. The display returns to the
sizes are approved.
Tire pressure menu. The on-board computer
additionally displays the message “System
learning”.
Note
The message “Process aborted” appears if the
setting process is interrupted. All entries made
up to this point are lost, and the original settings
remain in effect. Only if the message “Process

Controls, Instruments 131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 complete” appears after the settings have been
made will the Tire Pressure Monitoring re-learn the
wheels.
Please observe the chapter ”SYSTEM LEARN-
ING” on page 133.
Before fitting tires with sizes which are not stored
in the on-board computer, the missing information
should be supplemented in the on-board computer.
Please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.
Use only tires approved by Porsche.
The available items in the Tire pressure menu
depend on the equipment of your vehicle. For this
reason it is possible that some of the items shown
here are not available on your on-board computer’s
display.
Load (depending on equipment level) Select partial load or full load and push the
operating lever forward.
Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field. Please observe the chapter ”TIRE PRESSURES
FOR COLD TIRES” on page 334.
Select “TPC” with the operating lever.
Make sure that the tire pressures correspond
Push operating lever forward. The display
to the on-board computer settings. Correct
changes to the Tire pressure menu.
the tire pressures if necessary.
Select “Load” with the operating lever.

132 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire pressure warnings The tire pressure warning contains the When the tire pressure warning has appeared
affected tire with the tire pressure to be on the on-board computer, stop immediately at
The Tire Pressure Monitoring warns about loss in added. Correct the tire pressure at the next a suitable location. Check the tire for signs of
pressure in two stages, depending on the amount opportunity. damage. If necessary, fill in tire sealant and set
of pressure loss: the correct tire pressure.
This tire pressure warning appears with vehicle
Stage 1 - Add air (3 psi to 6 psi (0.2 bar to 0.4 bar) stopped and can be deactivated. The tire pressure This tire pressure warning appears when driving
loss in pressure) warning light in the instrument panel goes out when and can be deactivated. The tire pressure warning
Stage 2 - Flat tire (from 6 psi (0.4 bar) loss in the tire pressure has been corrected. light in the instrument panel goes out when the tire
pressure) pressure has been corrected.
Stage 2 - Flat tire
Stage 1 - Add air The pressure in the tire has dropped by more than System learning
The pressure in the tire is too low by 3 psi to 6 psi 6 psi (0.4 bar). This significant pressure loss is a The Tire Pressure Monitoring begins to “learn” the
(0.2 bar to 0.4 bar). Driving with insufficient tire danger to road safety. wheels after a wheel change, wheel transmitter
pressure reduces the road safety of the vehicle and replacement or update of the tire settings. During
destroys the tire and wheel.

Controls, Instruments 133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 this process, the Tire Pressure Monitoring recog- Changing a wheel and replacing tires No monitoring
nizes the tires and their locations. The on-board
New wheels must be fitted with radio transmit- In the event of faults the Tire Pressure Monitoring
computer displayes the message “TPC inactive -
ters for the Tire Pressure Monitoring. Before cannot monitor the tire pressure. The warning
system learning”.
tires are changed, the battery charge state of light on the instrument panel lights up and a
The Tire Pressure Monitoring requires a certain the wheel transmitters should be checked at corresponding message appears on the on-board
amount of time to learn the wheels. During this an authorized Porsche dealer. computer.
time, the current tire pressures are not available on
Switch the ignition off when changing a wheel. Monitoring is not active when:
the on-board-computer:
The tire settings on the on-board computer must be – the Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty,
– The display of the Tire pressure function of the
updated after changing a wheel.
on-board computer shows lines. – wheel transmitters for the Tire Pressure
A message appears if the characteristics of the Monitoring are missing,
– The required pressures for cold tires at
new tires do not agree with the on-board computer
68°F (20°C ) are indicated in the Info pressure – temporarily after changing a wheel (learning
settings.
display in the Tire pressure menu. phase),
Update the on-board computer settings when
– Tire pressure warnings are issued without tire – more than four wheel transmitters are detect-
the vehicle is stationary the next time.
pressure and position information (gure) as ed,
soon as the vehicle’s own wheels have been – there is external interference by other radio
Warning light
detected and the tire pressure warning light sources, e.g. wireless headphones,
has gone out.
The warning light in the speedometer lights up: – tire temperatures are too high.
Position and pressure information is displayed as
soon as the Tire Pressure Monitoring has assigned – When a loss in pressure has been detected Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS
the wheels identified as belonging to the vehicle to – If the Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE
the correct wheel positions. ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143.
– When learning newly mounted wheels/wheel
The wheel learning process takes place exclusively sensors, as long as the vehicle’s own wheels
when the vehicle is being driven. have not yet been recognized.
Manually check the tire pressure at all wheels The tire pressure warning light in the instrument
and correct the tire pressure to the required panel goes out only when the cause of the fault has
value. been rectified.

134 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The tire pressure increases or decreases by
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18°F (10°C )
change in temperature.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring takes this relationship
between tire pressure and temperature into
account.

Tire pressure specications

Information on tire pressure for public roads can
be found in this Owner’s Manual in the Technical
Data chapter or on the tire-pressure plate in the left
door aperture. These values apply to cold tires at
68°F (20°C ) ambient temperature.

A Tire pressure
B Tire temperature
C Tire pressures for cold tires
D Tire pressure for hot tires
E Pressure increase as the result of tempera-
ture increase
F Pressure drop in faulty/leaking tires
1 Required-pressure line
2 Warning stage 1 (from -3 psi to -6 psi
(-0.2 bar to -0.4 bar))
3 Warning stage 2 (from -6 psi (-0.4 bar))

Pressure increase as the result of

temperature increase
In accordance with physical principles, the air
pressure changes as the temperature changes.

Controls, Instruments 135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OIL Display and measurement of
the engine oil level
Conditions for measuring the oil level

Caution!
Risk of engine damage.
Regularly check the oil level after refueling.
Do not allow the oil level to fall below the
minimum mark.

1. It is important to ensure that the vehicle is

horizontal for correct oil level measurement
to occur.
2. Engine is off.
It is best to measure the engine oil level before Once the measurement has been completed,
3. Ignition on. embarking on a journey (if the vehicle has not you can read off the engine oil level on the
been driven for an extended period) or with segment display.
Oil return time the engine at operating temperature. Shorter
– If the segments are filled in up to the top line,
Before the oil level is measured, the engine oil waiting times are achieved in this way.
the oil level has reached the maximum mark.
has to have flowed back into the oil pan. The time
Initiating oil level measurement Under no circumstances add engine oil.
taken for the engine oil to flow back depends on the
engine temperature and how long the engine has Switch ignition on (do not start the engine).
been stopped. The engine-oil level measurement display
This waiting time is counted down in the on-board appears in the on-board computer.
computer display when the ignition is switched on. Allow waiting time to elapse.
The oil level display segments start to “cycle”.

136 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Never add more engine oil than required Oil level measurement during refueling
to reach the maximum mark.
The oil level is automatically measured during
refueling.

Preconditions
1. Ignition is switched off.
2. If the engine is at operating temperature, at
least 5 minutes must elapse between parking
the vehicle and starting the engine.
3. Refueling completed within 15 minutes.
When the ignition is switched on, the engine oil level
is shown on the segment display.
Measurement will be stopped if the above require-
ments are not met.
Start oil level measurement in the “OIL“ menu
– If only the bottom segment is filled in, the oil
or
level has reached the minimum mark.
Start oil level measurement by switching on
Add engine oil immediately.
the ignition.
– If the bottom segment flashes, the oil level has
dropped to below the minimum mark. Failure
Add engine oil immediately. A failure of the oil level display is indicated by a
The difference between the minimum and max- warning message in the on-board computer.
imum marks on the segment display is approx.
1.2 liters. Each segment of the display corre-
sponds to a quantity approx. 0.4 liter.
Add engine oil if necessary.
Please observe the chapter ”ENGINE OIL
LEVEL” on page 236.

Controls, Instruments 137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The oil level measurement can also be
initiated in the “OIL” menu:
Switching on selection eld “D”
Push operating lever forward.

Initiating measurement
Select “OIL” with the operating lever.
Push operating lever forward. Measurement is
started.

138 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SET Basic setting on on-board
computer
Switching on selection eld “D”
Push operating lever forward.

Changing the basic setting of the on-board

computer
Select “SET” with the operating lever.

Push operating lever forward.

Select the desired function with the operating
lever.

Controls, Instruments 139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Display (Select central line of the
on-board computer)
Change display
– Audio information (set radio station)
– Range on remaining fuel
– Empty

Telephone info
When Telephone information is active, incoming
telephone calls are displayed on the on-board
computer.

Reset
– Reset all,
– Reset average consumption,
– Reset average speed,
– Reset trip counter

Units
– Speedometer km - km/h, miles - mph
– Consumption l/100 km, mls/gal (USA), mpg
(UK), km/l
– Temperature Celsius, Fahrenheit
– Tire pressure bar, psi

140 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Navigation 12/24h mode
– Integrated in the BC (Navigation instructions Select time mode:
can be recalled on the on-board computer
– 12 h (small squares on the right side of the
display)
time display for AM/PM),
– When turning off (Navigation instructions are
– 24 h
only shown before changing direction)

Basic setting
– Restore the basic setting of the on-board
computer

Language
– Select language version

Controls, Instruments 141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 General information regarding the Tire pressure
on-board computer functions The Tire pressure function of the on-board
computer displays the tire pressures dependent
Range on remaining fuel on temperature in the four wheels. You can watch
the tire pressure rise and fall while driving. The
The range on remaining fuel is continuously display is only for information. To correct the tire
recalculated during the journey based on the pressures, always use the displayed values from
fuel level, current consumption and average the “Info pressure” display in the Tire pressure
consumption. The more the fuel level falls, the menu.
more spontaneously the display reacts. For
this reason, the range on remaining fuel is not
displayed if less than 9 miles (15 kilometers).
If the vehicle’s inclination changes while driving
or refueling, incorrect range information may
temporarily be given.
Note
If the tank is nearly empty and you top up with
only a small quantity of fuel, an accurate range on
remaining fuel is impossible.

Average consumption and average speed

The values displayed are based on the distance
travelled since the last reset to “zero”.
You can set the starting time for a measurement
before or during the trip. Switching the ignition off
does not reset the measurements. It is therefore
possible to collect values over long periods.
Disconnecting the car battery will cause these
memories to be erased.

142 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warnings on the instrument panel and the on-board computer
Survey of warnings
If a warning message appears, always refer to the corresponding chapters in the Owner’s Manual. Warning messages are issued only if all measurement precon-
ditions are met. Therefore, check all fluid levels regularly - in particular, always check the engine oil level after refuelling.

Instrument panel On-board computer Text display on on-board Meaning/measure

computer

Seat belt Driver and passengers must fasten

their seat belts.

Handbrake Handbrake is still on.

Ignition key not removed

Replace battery in ignition key Replace the remote-control battery.

Ignition lock faulty, please go to Have the fault remedied at an

workshop authorized Porsche dealer.

Ignition lock faulty, visit workshop Have the fault remedied at an

now authorized Porsche dealer.

Relieve steering Relieve the steering lock by moving

the steering wheel to the left or right.

Steering locked The steering wheel lock remains

engaged. Have the fault remedied at
an authorized Porsche dealer.

Lights on Low beam/side marker lamps on

Controls, Instruments 143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument panel On-board computer Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
computer

Parking light on Left/right parking light on

Check left/right dipped beam (low The reported light is faulty. Check
beam) bulb. Have the fault remedied at an
also applies to: front side lights, authorized Porsche dealer.
direction indicator, high beam,
fog lights, side indicator light,
brake light, tail light, rear fog light,
reversing light, raised brake light,
side marker

Daytime driving lights off Daytime driving lights switch off when
the engine is shut off. Switch on
lights if necessary.

Headlight beam adjustment faulty Have the fault remedied at an

authorized Porsche dealer.

Front lid not closed Close luggage compartment lid

properly.

Rear lid not closed Close engine compartment lid

properly.

Targa panel not closed Close glass rear hatch.

Rain sensor faulty Have the fault remedied at an

authorized Porsche dealer.

Refill washer fluid

144 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument panel On-board computer Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
computer

LIMIT Cannot be accepted with The current speed can only be

vehicle stopped accepted for the acoustic warning
signal when the vehicle is in motion.

LIMIT 30 Selected speed limit (e.g. 30 mph)

for the acoustic warning signal has
been exceeded. Adjust your speed if
necessary.

Fuel gauge warning light Consider remaining range Refuel at next opportunity.

Check engine oil level Start engine oil level measurement in

the on-board computer.
The vehicle must be horizontal and
the ignition must be switched on.

Engine oil pressure too low Stop immediately at a suitable place,

measure oil level with the on-board
computer and, if necessary, add
engine oil.

Warning light Engine temperature too high Switch engine off and let it cool.
Temperature gauge Check coolant level and, if neces-
sary, add coolant.

Temperature gauge warning light Check coolant level Switch engine off and let it cool.
flashes Check coolant level and, if neces-
sary, add coolant.

Controls, Instruments 145

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument panel On-board computer Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
computer

Engine diagnostics - workshop Stop immediately at a suitable place

and check tank cap for proper
fastening. If the tank cap was
fastened correctly, consult your
authorized Porsche dealer.

Reduced engine power Consult your authorized Porsche

dealer.

Temperature gauge warning light Failure of engine compartment Consult your authorized Porsche
flashes blower dealer.

Warning Battery/generator Stop at a safe place and switch

the engine off. Do not continue
driving. Have the fault remedied at
an authorized Porsche dealer.

Oil pressure gauge faulty Have the fault remedied at an

authorized Porsche dealer.

Oil level display faulty Have the fault remedied at an

authorized Porsche dealer.

Oil temperature gauge faulty Have the fault remedied at an

authorized Porsche dealer.

Indicator faulty Coolant indicator failed. Have the

fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

Brake pad wear Have the brake pads changed

immediately at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

146 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument panel On-board computer Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
computer

Warning - Brake fluid level Stop immediately in a suitable place.

Do not continue driving. Have the
fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

Warning - Brake circuit division Stop immediately in a suitable place.

Do not continue driving. Have the
fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

ABS failure Have the fault remedied at an

authorized Porsche dealer.

PSM off Porsche Stability Management has

been switched off.

PSM on Porsche Stability Management has

been switched on.

PSM failure Have the fault remedied at an

authorized Porsche dealer.

PASM Normal/Sport Indicator for selected PASM mode

PASM failure Have the fault remedied at an

authorized Porsche dealer.

PASM indicator faulty Have the fault remedied at an

authorized Porsche dealer.

Sport mode failure Have the fault remedied at an

authorized Porsche dealer.

Controls, Instruments 147

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument panel On-board computer Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
computer

Airbag system fault Airbag is faulty. Have the fault

remedied at an authorized Porsche
dealer.

Check passenger’s seat setting Weight sensing is impaired on the

front passenger’s seat (Advanced
Airbag). Correct the seating position,
set the backrest upright, do not
support weight on the armrests, or
lift on the handles.

Failure spoiler control Driving stability is impaired. Adjust

your driving style. Reduce speed.
Have the fault remedied at an
authorized Porsche dealer.

Display of selector lever position Selector lever is not engaged Tiptronic S: Selector lever can be
flashes between two positions. Engage the
selector lever correctly.

Move selector lever to P Tiptronic S:

Move selector lever to position P
before withdrawing key from ignition
lock.

Apply brake Tiptronic S:

Apply the brake when starting.

Depress clutch pedal Manual transmission:

Depress clutch pedal when starting.

148 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument panel On-board computer Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
computer

Move selector lever to position P or Tiptronic S:

N The vehicle can be started only in the
selector lever position P or N.

Display of selector lever position Tiptronic emergency run Have the fault remedied at an
flashes authorized Porsche dealer.

System fault Several systems may have failed.

Go to workshop Adjust your driving style. Reduce
speed. Have the fault remedied at an
authorized Porsche dealer.

Failure of fuel level indicator Have the fault remedied at an

Workshop authorized Porsche dealer.

Service in km/days Service indicator

Bring the vehicle in for service no
later than after the distance/time
shown has elapsed.
Please observe the additional
information in the “Maintenance”
booklet.

Service now Service indicator

Have your vehicle serviced at an
authorized Porsche dealer.

Failure Activate convertible top in opposite

Convertible-top control direction.
If there is a failure:
Consult an authorized Porsche
dealer.

Controls, Instruments 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument panel On-board computer Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
computer

Convertible top not in limit position Fully open or close convertible top

Opening convertible top Message goes out in final position

Closing convertible top Message goes out in final position

Close rear lid The convertible top cannot be

operated with the rear lid open.

Failure Consult an authorized Porsche

Roll-over protection dealer.

Flat tyre! Tire Pressure Monitoring has

detected a serious pressure loss.
Stop in a suitable place and check
tires for damage. Fill in tire sealant if
necessary.

Add air The Tire Pressure Monitoring has

detected a gradual pressure loss.
Correct tire pressure at the next
opportunity.

150 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument panel On-board computer Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
computer

TPC inactive The Tire Pressure Monitoring is

System learning learning the wheels on the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring is
searching for the tires and their
position. During this period the
current pressure specifications
are not available on the on-board
computer.

TPC inactive The Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty.

Consult an authorized Porsche
dealer.

TPC inactive The Tire Pressure Monitoring is

Brief disturbance temporarily deactivated by excessive
TPC inactive tire temperatures (approx. 120 C
Too many wheel transmitters (248F)) or external interference (e.g.
from other wheel transmitters inside
the car). Once the source of the
interference is removed, the system
is automatically reactivated.

Controls, Instruments 151

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument panel On-board computer Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
computer

Wheel change? Update the settings in the TPC menu

Input new TPC settings! of the on-board computer at the next
opportunity. Wrong entries will affect
the correct pressure information in
the menu. The safety of your vehicle
is at risk.

TPC Indicator faulty The display of the Tire Pressure

Monitoring is faulty.
Consult an authorized Porsche
dealer.

Acknowledging warning messages

Warning messages can be deleted from the on-board computer display.
Push the on-board computer operating lever forward.
You can recall erased warning messages in the “INFO” menu.

152 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency
repairs, move the car well off the road. Switch
on the emergency flasher and mark the car
with road flares or other warning devices.
Do not remain in the car. Someone approach-
ing from the rear may not realize your vehicle
is stopped and cause a collision.

Warning!
Danger of re.

Emergency Flasher Switch Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas

where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
Operational readiness of the emergency flasher other flammable material.
does not depend on the ignition lock and turn signal
lever position.
If your car is disabled or parked under emer- Warning!
gency conditions switch on the emergency
flasher in the dashboard. All turn signals and Hot engine compartment components can
the indicator light in the switch flash with the burn skin on contact.
same frequency. Before working on any part in the engine
compartment, turn the engine off and let it
cool down sufficiently.

Controls, Instruments 153

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fog lights Welcome Home Lighting
in addition to parking lights or low beam:
Pull switch to first click. Indicator light on. Switching on
The fog lights will go out automatically Move light switch to the HOME position.
when the high beams are switched on.
For improved visibility and security when you get in
Rear fog light and out of the car, the fog lights and the tail lights
in addition to the fog lights: remain on for a certain period of time:
Pull switch to second click. Indicator light
on. – When you get out of the car, the lights are
turned on for approx. 30 seconds after the
Warning chime door is opened. The off-delay time resumes
when the vehicle is locked. On vehicles with
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is the Sport Chrono Package Plus, the PCM
opened while the lights (not the parking light or can be used to set the off-delay time. This
Welcome Home lighting) are on, a chime warns of setting also changes the lighting period for
possible battery discharge. unlocking the vehicle. Please observe the
In some countries, differences are possible chapter “Individual Memory” in the separate
due to provisions of law. PCM operating instructions.
Light Switch
– The lights are turned on for approx. 30 sec-
Vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus onds when the vehicle is unlocked. The
Switch settings Further individual light functions (e.g. daytime lights go out if the ignition is switched on or
driving lights) are available in vehicles with the when leaving the Welcome Home lighting.
Lights switched off Sport Chrono Package Plus.
Please observe the chapter “Individual
Welcome Home Function Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
Parking lights
side marker lights, license plate light ,
instrument illumination
Low beam, high beam
Only with ignition on

154 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment
Function
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights feature
automatic headlight beam adjustment.
When the ignition is switched on, the level of
the headlight beam automatically changes in
accordance with the vehicle load. The level of
the headlight beam is automatically kept constant
during acceleration and braking.

Checking operation
1. Switch the low beam on.
2. Insert ignition key and switch ignition on. The
light beam first dips all the way down and is
then adapted to the vehicle load.
If this test item is not met, the headlight beam
adjustment system must be checked by an
authorized Porsche dealer.

Controls, Instruments 155

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lever in center position - Low beam
When high beam and headlight flasher are select-
ed, the blue indicator light in the tachometer is lit.
The turn signal lever turns off automatically
when the steering wheel is straightened out after
completing a turn.

Lane changer
To indicate your intention when changing lanes
on the freeway, slightly lift or depress the lever
to the resistance point. The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If the frequency of the display becomes
noticeable faster, check the operation of the
turn signal bulbs.

Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer Headlight asher

/Parking light / Flasher Lever (With ignition on or off)
To flash the headlights to oncomming motor-
Operation ists, slightly pull the lever toward the steering
Turn signals, low beam and high beam are ready wheel and then release it. The blue indicator
for operation when the ignition is on. light in the tachometer will go on/off as you
pull/release the lever.
1 – Turn signal left
2 – Turn signal right Parking light
Push the lever to the upper or lower pressure The parking light can only be switched on when the
point - turn signals flash three times ignition is switched off.
3 – High beam Move the lever up or down to switch on the
right or left parking light.
4 – Headlight flasher

156 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever Move wiper lever downwards. The front
windshield wipers wipe once.
General information 5 – Windshield wipers and washer system:
Pull wiper lever towards the steering wheel.
Warning!
The washer system sprays and wipes while
Danger of injury when the windshield wipers the lever is pulled towards the steering wheel.
operate unintentionally, e.g. in rain sensor When the wiper lever is released, a few drying
operation. Risk of damage to the windshield wipes are executed.
and wiper system.
Avoid running the wiper blades over a dry
A - Headlight washer
windshield to prevent scratching the glass. Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights
Spray washer fluid on the windshield first. A
The washer sprays only while low beam or high
scratched windshield will reduce visibility.
beam is switched on.
Always loosen wiper blades from frozen glass
Briefly push button A to operate headlight
before operating wipers to prevent damage to
washer system.
the wiper motor or blades.
Front wiper and headlight washer system If heavily soiled, repeat wash.
Always switch off windshield wipers in car
wash to prevent them wiping unintentionally 0 – Windshield wipers off The headlight washer system automatically sprays
(intermittent or sensor operation). once for every ten times the front windshield
1 – Rain sensor operation for front windshield washer system is operated.
Always switch off windshield wipers before wipers
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional Note
operation (intermittent or sensor operation). Move wiper lever upwards to the first click.
The windshield washer nozzles are heated when
Do not operate the headlight washer in car 2 – Windshield wipers slow the ignition is on, as a precaution against freezing.
washes. Move wiper lever upwards to the second click.
Do not operate headlight washer when it is 3 – Windshield wipers fast
frozen.
Move wiper lever upwards to the third click.
4 – Front windshield wiper - one-touch opera-
tion:

Controls, Instruments 157

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.

Rear Wiper Rain sensor

6 – Rear window wiper - intermittent operation
Wiper speed
Move wiper lever forwards to the first click.
The rain sensor on the windshield measures the
The rear window wiper wipes at preset
amount of rainfall (snowfall too). Wiper speed is
intervals.
automatically adjusted accordingly.
The rear wiper is automatically switched off when
a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h) is exceeded. It Switching on
is switched on again when the speed falls below
Move wiper lever upwards to the first click.
124 mph (200 km/h).
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus, Switching off
further rear wiper functions can be selected via the
Move wiper lever to position 0.
PCM.

158 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The rain sensor remains switched off if the wiper Porsche window cleaner. If they are very dirty
lever is already in position 1 when the ignition is (e.g. with insect remains), they can be cleaned
switched on. with a sponge or cloth.
To switch the rain sensor on again: If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this may be as a
result of the following:
Move wiper lever to position 0 and then to
position 1 or If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash,
wax residues may be adhering to the windshield.
Operate windshield washer system 5 or
These wax residues can only be removed by using
Change the sensitivity of the rain sensor with a special cleaning solution.
four-stage switch A.
Please observe the chapter ”WASHER FLUID”
Switch-on is confirmed by one wipe of the wind- on page 250.
shield.
Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer for
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus, further information.
further rain sensor functions can be selected via
The wiper blades may be damaged.
the PCM.
Replace wiper blades as soon as possible.
Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.

Changing the sensitivity of the rain sensor

Sensitivity can be set with switch A in 4 stages:
Adjust switch A upwards - high sensitivity.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the
windshield.
Adjust switch A downwards - low sensitivity.
Maintenance note
Periodically clean the wiper blades with a win-
dow cleaner, especially after the vehicle has
been washed in a car wash. We recommend

Controls, Instruments 159

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicles with Tiptronic Then briefly push the operating lever forward
(position 1).
Additional downshifts are carried out to help
maintain the pre-selected speed (especially when
driving downhill).

Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death. A constant speed
may not be safe in heavy trafc, or on winding
or slippery roads. With the speed control
system engaged, the engine speed will not
return to idle when removing the foot from the
accelerator pedal.
Do not use the speed control when it may be
unsafe to keep the car at a constant speed.

A - Automatic speed control readiness off/on Observe all local and national speed limits.
1 - +SPEED/SET (accelerate/store)
2 - -SPEED (decelerate)
3 - OFF (interrupt)
4 - RESUME Switch automatic speed control readiness
on
Automatic Speed Control Press button A on the automatic speed control
lever.
Function This green indicator light in the speedom-
The automatic speed control maintains any eter now indicates readiness
selected speed between 15 mph and 145 mph
(30 km/h and 240 km/h) without you having to Hold and store speed
use the accelerator pedal. The automatic speed Bring the car to the desired speed with the
control is operated with the lever on the steering accelerator.
wheel.

160 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Accelerating (e.g. to overtake) Decelerating Interrupting automatic speed control
operation
Option 1 Option 1
Increase the speed as usual with the acceler- Pull operating lever towards the steering wheel Manual interruption
ator. When you ease off the accelerator, the (position 2) until the desired speed is reached. Pull operating lever downwards briefly
previously saved value is set again. The speed reached is maintained and stored (position 3) or
when the lever is released.
Option 2 Operate brake or clutch pedal or

Push operating lever forward (position 1) until

Option 2 Switch Tiptronic transmission to selector lever
the desired speed is reached. The speed Briefly move lever towards the steering wheel position N.
reached is maintained and stored when the (position 2) (a maximum of 10 times). The Please observe the chapter ”TIPTRONIC S” on
lever is released. speed is reduced by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each page 193.
time.
The speed driven before the interruption remains
Option 3
stored in the memory.
Push lever slightly forwards (position 1)
Vehicles with Tiptronic
(a maximum of 10 times). The speed is Additional downshifts are carried out to improve Automatic speed control operation is
increased by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time. deceleration (especially when driving downhill). interrupted automatically:
Note on operation – If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more
Speed control operation is automatically interrupt- than approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) for longer than
ed if the speed is increased by more than approx. 20 seconds.
16 mph (25 km/h) for longer than 20 seconds. – If the actual vehicle speed falls to approx.
6 mph (10 km/h) below the set vehicle speed
for longer than 5 seconds (upward slopes).
– For PSM control operations.

Resuming the stored speed

Briefly push operating lever upwards (position
4). The speed control accelerates/deceler-
ates the vehicle to the stored speed.

Controls, Instruments 161

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The stored speed should only be recalled when
traffic conditions and the road surface so permit.

Switching automatic speed control

readiness off
Press button A on the automatic speed
control lever. The green readiness light in
the speedometer goes off.
When the vehicle is parked and the ignition
switched off, the memory is cleared.
Note
On upward or downward slopes, the set speed
cannot always be maintained by the automatic
speed control.
To obtain sufficient engine braking or a better
engine-speed range, therefore, you have to
select a lower gear.

162 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Seat heating, left
B - Defrosting the windshield
C - Recirculating-air button
D - Temperature sensor
E - ECO button (air-conditioning compressor
off/on)
F - Heated rear window
G - Seat heater, right
H - Temperature button
I - AUTO button (automatic mode)
J - Air distribution to footwell
K - Air distribution to central and side vents
L - Air distribution to windshield
M - Blower speed button

Automatic Air Conditioning System All automatic setting functions can be individually If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system is
changed. This setting is retained until the appropri- operating at maximum cooling or heating power.
Automatic mode ate function button is pressed again or the AUTO Automatic control is no longer active.
button is pressed.
The automatic air-conditioning system controls Note
the preselected interior temperature completely If the preselected temperature is changed, the
automatically. If necessary, the automatic system
Setting temperature
blower speed can increase automatically in
can be manually influenced. Press button H upwards or downwards automatic mode. The desired temperature is
respectively. reached more quickly this way.
Press AUTO button I. AUTO will appear on the
display panel. Air quantity and distribution are To suit personal comfort, the interior tem- Note on operation
automatically controlled and variations are perature can be adjusted between 61°F and
compensated. 85°F /16°C and 29.5°C . Sensors: To avoid affecting the performance of
the air-conditioning system:
Recommendation: 72F/22C.

Controls, Instruments 163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do not cover the sun sensor on the instrument Adjusting blower speed Recirculating-air setting
panel or the temperature sensor D.
Press button M upwards or downwards
Defrosting the windshield respectively. The preset blower speed is
Function
increased or decreased. The outside-air supply is interrupted and only the
Press button B (switch on or off). The wind- inside air is circulated.
The speed stages are indicated by a bar display.
shield is defogged or defrosted as quickly as
possible. Air flows to the windshield only. The If the button is pressed downwards at the lowest Warning!
light-emitting diode in the button lights up. blower stage, the blower and automatic control are
switched off. “OFF” will appear on the display field. Risk of accident due to impaired vision,
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
ECO - switching compressor for Pressing the button upwards or pressing the AUTO In recirculating-air setting, the windows may
air-conditioning system on and off button switches the blower and automatic control fog up.
back on again.
The air-conditioning compressor switches off Only select recirculating-air setting for short
automatically at temperatures below approx. periods.
37°F /3°C and cannot be switched on, even
manually. If the windows fog up, switch recirculating-air
setting off immediately by pressing the
Whenever outside temperatures exceed approx. recirculating-air button again and select the
37°F /3°C , the air-conditioning compressor “Defrost windshield” function.
is always switched on in automatic mode. The
compressor can be switched off to save fuel, but
control comfort is then limited:
Switching recirculating-air setting on or off
Press ECO button E. The compressor is
switched off. The light-emitting diode in the Press button C. The light-emitting diode in the
button lights up. button lights up.
If the interior temperature is too high, switch
Over approx. 37 °F/3 °C
compressor back on or press AUTO button.
If the air-conditioning compressor was off, it
To dry incoming air in damp weather, do not switch
switches on automatically. The duration of
off the air-conditioning compressor. This prevents
recirculating-air setting is not limited.
fogging of windows.

164 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Below approx. 37 °F/3 °C Air distribution chapter “Individual Memory” in the separate
PCM operating instructions.
The air-conditioning compressor is switched off.
Recirculating-air setting is automatically ended
Settings
after approx. 3 minutes . The individual air distributions can be combined as General instructions for air-conditioning
desired. compressor
Recommended setting in Summer: Air distribution – Can switch off briefly if engine is under an
to central and side vents. extreme load to ensure sufficient engine
cooling.
Recommended setting in Winter: Air distribution to
footwell and windshield. – Switches off automatically at temperatures
below approx. 37°F /3°C and cannot be
Air distribution to footwell switched on, even manually.
– Operates most effectively with windows
Press button J. The air flows to the footwell. closed. If the car has been in the sun for a long
The selection appears on the display panel. time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior
briefly with the windows open.
Air distribution to central and side – Depending on the outside temperature and
vents humidity, condensation can drip from the
evaporator and form a pool under the vehicle.
Press button K. The air flows from the central This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
and side vents. Vents must be open. The
selection appears on the display panel. – If uncooled air flows out when the lowest
temperature has been set, switch off the
Air distribution to windshield air-conditioning compressor and have the
fault repaired at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Press button L. The air flows to the windshield.

The selection appears on the display panel.
Note on operation
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Plus, individual air conditioning settings can
be stored on your car key. Please observe the

Controls, Instruments 165

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Continuous opening and closing
B - Setting vent direction

Central and Side Vents Outside air or conditioned air can be delivered from Fresh-air intake
all vents, depending on the air-distribution setting
Opening vents on the operating panel. To ensure proper air intake:
Keep the fresh-air inlet between the luggage
Rotate knurled wheel upward. compartment lid and the windshield free from
snow, ice and leaves.
Closing vents

Rotate knurled wheel downward.

Changing air ow direction

Move the vanes to make the air flow in the
desired direction.

166 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Switching off
Press button. The light-emitting diode in the
button goes out.

Heated Rear Window/Door

Mirror Heating
Switching on
The heated rear window/door mirror heating is
ready for operation when the ignition is on.
Press button. The light-emitting diode in the
button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes , the heating switches off
automatically. The heater can be switched back on
by pressing the button again.

Controls, Instruments 167

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning!
Danger of re.
Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal,
as it could pose a fire hazard.

Ashtray
Opening
Open ashtray lid.

Emptying
Open ashtray and carefully pull out ash insert.
Leave ashtray lid open. Push in ash insert.

168 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Heating lighter
Open ashtray lid.
Push in knob of the cigarette lighter. When
ready for use, the lighter will snap back.
Note on operation
The lighter receptacle is not to be used for
electrical accessories (except for the tire filling
compressor).
Maximum power consumption: 150 W
Please observe the chapter ”SOCKETS” on
page 292.

Cigarette Lighter

Warning!
Danger of re and burning. The cigarette
lighter is ready for use, regardless of the
ignition lock position.
Never leave unsupervised children in the car.
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter.
Hold the lighter by the knob only.

Controls, Instruments 169

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cupholder
Holder for drinks cans and cups
Keep the cupholder closed while driving.

Warning!
Risk of scalding or damage due to spilling
drinks.
Only use beverage containers which fit.
Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
Never use hot drinks.

Extending cupholder Press the symbol for the respective cupholder.

Press the panel. The panel opens. Close panel in the middle.
The cupholders can be pulled out to hold larger
containers.

170 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Pulling cupholder out
Pull out holder (arrow).
Insert container.
Carefully slide holder inwards to adjust it to the
container size.

Closing cupholder
Push cupholder drawer in.
Open panel in the middle.
Close and engage the cupholder.
Close panel in the middle.

Controls, Instruments 171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Storage in the Passenger – clothes hook on back of front backrests
(depending on vehicle equipment),
Compartment
– enlarged storage space by folding the rear
Additional storage possibilities seat backrests forward.

Warning!
Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may
come loose during braking, rapid directional
changes or in an accident and cause serious
personal injury or death.
Do not transport any heavy objects in the
storage trays.
Do not carry unsecured luggage or objects in
the passenger compartment.

– in the doors, Storage tray between the seats

– in the door sill next to the passenger’s seat,
Opening
– in the center console,
Press release button and lift the lid. There is a
– behind the rear seat backrests (only with the coin holder and socket in the forward part of
convertible top closed on the Cabriolet, when the storage tray.
opening the convertible top there should not
Please observe the chapter ”SOCKETS” on
be any objects in the area behind the rear
page 292.
seats - risk of damage),
– storage tray with coin holder between seats,
– glove compartment with CD and pen holder,
– clothes hook on the roof frame,

172 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Locking
Lock the catch to secure the contents against
unauthorized access.

Glove compartment CD holder

Opening drawers
Warning!
Push the button of the drawer you wish to
Risk of injury by the glove compartment lid in open.
case of an accident.
Keep the glove compartment closed while
Closing drawers
driving. Fold up CD drawer and close until it engages.

Occupied drawers
Opening Occupied drawers are indicated by a red window.

Pull the catch and open the lid.

Controls, Instruments 173

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Pen holder
A pen can be clipped in on the right side of the CD
holder.

174 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The luggage compartment lid can also be unlocked
with the radio remote control.
Please observe the chapter ”KEY WITH RADIO
REMOTE CONTROL” on page 23.
Note
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the luggage
compartment lid can be opened only by connecting
an external electrical power source.
Please observe the chapter ”ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM” on page 292.
Please observe the description inside the fuse
box lid.

Warning message

A - Opening luggage compartment lid A warning message in the on-board computer

B - Opening engine compartment lid comes on if the lids are not completely closed. Opening luggage compartment lid
Fully close the lid.
Caution!
Luggage Compartment Lid and
Risk of damage to luggage compartment lid
Engine Compartment Lid or windshield wipers.

Unlocking Make sure that the windshield wipers are not

folded out forwards when opening the luggage
Operate the appropriate pull-button next to the
compartment lid.
driver’s seat. The luggage compartment or
engine compartment is illuminated when the
respective lid is open. Raise lid slightly and unlatch the safety catch
Please observe the chapter ”LOAD SWITCH- with the lever (arrow).
OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on page
293.

Controls, Instruments 175

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Closing luggage compartment lid and
engine compartment lid
Lower the lid and close it.
Push the lid closed with the palm of your hand
in the area of the lock. Check that the lid has
correctly engaged in the lock.

Warning!
Risk of loss of control or an accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
Should you notice at any time while driving that
one of the lids is not secured properly, please
stop immediately in a suitable place and close
it. The front lid may fly up impairing vision.

176 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Access covers
Opening
(on vehicles with DVD navigation or CD changer)
Grasp access cover A or B at the handle and
open.
The drive for DVD navigation and the CD changer
can be found behind the access cover B.

Caution!
Risk of damage.
Do not store any heavy, damp or heat-sensitive
objects behind the access covers.

Luggage Compartment (Vehicles

without Four-Wheel Drive)
Position of the components
The position of the components in the luggage
compartment is dependent on the country equip-
ment and can vary from what is shown in this manu-
al.

Controls, Instruments 177

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Closing
Insert tool box into the guide pegs in the
luggage compartment floor.
Close tool box and lock the turn-locks C.

E - Adapter for security wheel bolts

F - Tire lling compressor
G - Towing hook
H - Tool kit
I - Tire sealant

Tool box
Opening
Unlock turn-locks C.
Open tool box and place it on the floor of the
luggage compartment.

178 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Caution!
Risk of damage.
Do not store any objects behind the access
cover A.

Tire sealant
The tire sealant is located behind the access cover
B.
Open access cover B using the opening.

B - Access cover for tire sealant

Luggage Compartment (Vehicles C - Tire lling compressor
with Four-Wheel Drive) D - Tool kit
E - Towing hook
Position of the components F - Adapter for security wheel bolts

The position of the components in the luggage

compartment is dependent on the country equip- Tools
ment and can vary from what is shown in this manu- The tools are located under the floor plate of the
al. luggage compartment.
Lift the floor plate on the opening and take out.
DVD navigation
The drive for DVD navigation and the audio
amplifier are on the rear wall of the luggage
compartment.

Controls, Instruments 179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning light
Danger!
A warning message in the on-board computer Risk of accident. If the warning message in
lights up when unlocking handle A is operated. the on-board computer lights up when the
Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning vehicle is in motion, the lid may impact in
lights light up. front of the windshield and can tear off. You
can lose control of the vehicle, and serious
Check the luggage compartment. personal injury or death may result.
Close the lid.
Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
message lights up.
Function with vehicle stationary
Check the luggage compartment.
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
unlocking handle A, the lid can be opened from the Close the lid.
inside immediately.
Note
Function with vehicle in motion
The lid cannot be opened from the inside if the
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
Trunk Entrapment unlocking handle A when a speed of 2 mph
battery is disconnected or empty.

(3 km/h) is exceeded, the warning message in Safety reasons require that you unscrew the
Your vehicle is equipped with an internal trunk latch striker of the lid lock if you plan to put
release mechanism. the on-board computer lights up. At the same time,
the lid is unlocked and the latch striker pops into the vehicle out of operation for an extended
A person trapped in the luggage compartment the catch-hook position. period.
can release the lid from the inside using unlocking Please consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
handle A. The handle A is fluorescent and glows in They will advise you about the necessary meas-
the dark. ures.
Note
When loading the luggage compartment,
make sure that items of luggage or other
objects cannot become caught on handle A.
This could cause the luggage compartment to
open unintentionally.

180 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The functional ability of the fire extinguisher
should be checked by a specialist workshop
every 1-2 years.
After use, have the fire extinguisher refilled.

Fire Extinguisher Inserting re extinguisher

1. Place fire extinguisher in the mounting.
Taking out re extinguisher
2. Engage fastening strap lug A in the tension
In cars equipped with a fire extinguisher, the jack and close tension jack (arrow).
extinguisher is fitted to the front of the driver’s
seat. Note

1. Hold fire extinguisher with one hand and press Pay attention to the final control date on the
the PRESS button on the fastening strap with fire extinguisher. If the fire extinguisher is used
the other hand (arrow). after its expiration date has elapsed, it may not
operate properly.
2. Remove fire extinguisher from mounting.
Follow the operating instructions on the fire
extinguisher.

Controls, Instruments 181

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Please read the instructions for the original
Warning! hand-held transmitter to find out whether the
Risk of accident when using the HomeLink original transmitter is equipped with fixed or
if persons, animals or objects are within the changeable code.
range of movement of the equipment that is
being operated.
When using the HomeLink, ensure that no
persons, animals or objects are within the
range of movement of the equipment that is
being operated.
Observe the safety notes for the original
hand-held transmitter.

Preconditions for operating and

1-3 - Programmable buttons programming the HomeLink:
A - Light-emitting diode for status identication – Ignition is switched on.
– Fog lights are switched off.
HomeLink To operate the respective device:
Function Press the appropriate button (1, 2 or 3).
Light-emitting diode A lights up during signal
The programmable HomeLink replaces up to three
transfer.
original hand-held transmitters used to operate
various devices (e.g. garage door, gate to the Note on operation
property, alarm system). Always use the HomeLink opener in the direc-
You can program buttons 1 to 3 with a frequency tion of travel. Otherwise, range restrictions
of an original handheld transmitter. cannot be ruled out.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the pro-
grammed signals of the HomeLink.

182 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 HomeLink with xed code system 3. Press the allocated HomeLink button twice.
(With some devices, the button to be allocated
1. Press the desired button until the light-emitting
must be pressed a third time in order to
diode begins to flash slowly. You then have
complete the setting process.)
approx. 5 minutes to perform steps 2 and 3.
4. Repeat the programming steps to allocate
2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx.
other buttons.
0 in. to 12 in. (0 to 30 cm) in front of the
marked position (figure) on the vehicle. Note
3. Press the transmit button on the original Please consult your authorized Porsche dealer
hand-held transmitter until the fog lights flash if you have not been able to successfully
three times (up to approx. 45 seconds). allocate signals for the garage door opener
to the buttons even though you have carefully
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to allocate other buttons.
followed the instructions in this chapter and
Note the operating instructions for the original
Several attempts with different distances between hand-held transmitter.
the vehicle and the original hand-held transmitter
might be necessary. To reprogram a single button:
Allocating signals to the buttons The fog lights will flash once the 5 minutes have 1. Press the desired button until the light-
been exceeded. Programming must be repeated emitting diode begins to flash slowly (approx.
Prior to programming the HomeLink for the from the beginning. 20 seconds). You then have approx. 5 minutes
to perform steps 2 and 3.
rst time
HomeLink with changeable code system 2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx.
Please follow the operating instructions for the
1. Allocate the required keys as for the systems 0 to 30 cm in front of the marked position
original hand-held transmitter.
with fixed code (steps 1 to 3). (figure) on the vehicle.
The following process deletes the standard codes
2. To synchronise the system: Press the pro- 3. Press the transmit button on the original
set at the factory. Do not repeat the process if you
gramming button on the receiver for the hand-held transmitter until the fog lights flash
program further buttons.
garage door actuator. Afterwards, you usu- three times (up to approx. 45 seconds).
Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3
ally have approx. 30 seconds to initiate step 3. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to allocate other buttons.
depressed for approx. 20 seconds until
light-emitting diode A begins to flash quick-
ly. All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3
are deleted.

Controls, Instruments 183

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note
Several attempts with different distances between
the vehicle and the hand-held transmitter might be
necessary.
The fog lights will flash once the 5 minutes have
been exceeded. Programming must be repeated
from the beginning in this case.

Deleting programmed signals of the HomeLink

(e.g., when selling the vehicle)
Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3
depressed for approx. 20 seconds until
light-emitting diode A begins to flash quick-
ly. All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3
are deleted.

184 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Porsche Communication is particularly susceptible to varying reception
conditions.
Management (PCM)
Electronic accessories should only be retrofitted
General information regarding the by your authorized Porsche dealer.
Porsche Communication Management Accessories which have not been tested and
approved by Porsche may impair radio function
Refer to the separate operating instructions
and reception.
before putting the PCM into operation.
Please observe the chapter ”LOAD SWITCH- Navigation
OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on page
293. When put into operation for the first time, a
distance of approx. 30 miles (50 km) must be
driven in order for the navigation system to
Warning!
complete the process of fine calibration. The
There is danger of accident if you set or same applies when the tires are changed (e.g.
operate the on-board computer, radio, summer/winter tires) or new tires fitted. Full
navigation system, telephone or other location accuracy is not yet achieved during the
equipment when driving. This could distract fine-calibration process.
you from trafc and cause you to lose control
If the vehicle has been transported (e.g. ferry,
of the vehicle resulting in serious personal
car train), the system may take a few minutes to
injury or death.
determine the current location after it has been
Operate the components while driving only if switched on.
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. Serious tire slip (e.g. spinning wheels on snow)
Carry out any complicated operating or setting may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation.
procedures only with the vehicle stationary. When the battery has been disconnected, it may
take up to 15 minutes before the navigation system
is operational again.
The reception conditions for the radio module
integrated in the PCM change continuously as
you drive. Interference from buildings, terrain and
the weather is unavoidable. FM stereo reception

Controls, Instruments 185

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Car Audio Operation/Tips If a vehicle is moving away from the desired the stronger second signal will be selected
station’s transmitter, the signal will tend to fade automatically until the original one returns. This
General information and/or drift. This condition is more prevalent swapping can also occur as you drive away from
with FM than AM, and is often accompanied by the selected station and approach another station
For radio operation see your radio manual
distortion. Fading and drifting can be minimized to of a stronger signal.
which is included with your on-board litera-
a certain degree by careful attention to fine tuning
ture.
or selection of a stronger signal. Compact disc player
Please observe the chapter ”LOAD SWITCH-
OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on page Static and uttering
293. Caution!
When the line-of-sight link between a transmitter
and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or moun- To avoid damage to compact disc player and
FM reception tains, the radio sound may be accompanied with discs.
A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio. static or fluttering because of the characteristic of
Because the vehicle moves, reception conditions FM. In a similar effect, a fluttering noise is some- Use only compact discs labeled as shown,
are constantly changing. Buildings, terrain, signal times heard when driving along a tree-lined road. having no dirt, damage or warpage.
distance and noise from other vehicles are all Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part
This static and fluttering can be reduced by adjust-
working against good reception. Some conditions of the player unit. Do not insert any object
ing the tone control for greater bass response until
affecting FM may appear to be problems when they other than a disc into the slot. Remember
the disturbance has passed.
are not. there are no user-serviceable parts inside the
The following characteristics are completely Multipath compact disc player.
normal for a given reception area, and they do Do not allow the disc to sustain any finger-
Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM,
not indicate any problem with the radio itself. prints, scrapes or stickers on the surfaces.
direct and reflected signals may reach the antenna
Note at the same time (multipath) and cancel each other This may cause poor sound quality. Hold the
out. As a vehicle moves through these electronic disc only on the edge or center hole.
Electronic accessories should only be installed by
your authorized Porsche dealer. Equipment which dead spots, the listener may hear a momentary When not in use, take the disc out of the
has not been tested and approved by Porsche may flutter or loss of reception. player, put the disc back into its case and
impair radio function and reception. store it away from dust, heat, damp and direct
Station swapping sunlight. Leaving the disc on the dashboard in
Fading and drifting the sun can damage the disc.
When two FM stations are close to each other, and
FM range is limited to about 25 miles (40 km), an electronic dead spot, such as static or multipath
except for some high power stations. area, interrupts the original signal, sometimes

186 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the disc gets dirty, clean the disc by wiping
the surfaces from the center to the outside
in a radial direction with a soft cloth. Do
not use a conventional record cleaner or
anti-static record preservative. Disc cleaners
are available in audio stores.

Antenna
Always unscrew the external antenna before using
an automatic car-wash.

Controls, Instruments 187

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Car Telephone and Aftermarket Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which Reception quality
is used in a Porsche must be properly installed
Alarms in accordance with the technical requirements of
The reception quality of your car telephone
will change constantly when you are driving.
Porsche.
Important legal and safety information Interference caused by buildings, landscape and
The transmission power must not exceed weather is unavoidable. It may become particularly
regarding the use of cellular telephones
10 W. The devices must possess a type approval difficult to hear when using the hands-free function
Some states may prohibit the use of cellular for your vehicle and have an “e” symbol. due to external noise such as engine and wind
telephones while driving a vehicle. Check the laws noise.
If you should require equipment with transmission
and regulations on the use of cellular telephones in
power values greater than 10 W, please consult
the areas where you drive.
your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose.
He is familiar with the technical requirements for
Danger! installing devices of this kind.
Risk of an accident. Severe personal injury or The antennas for all radios and telephones with a
death can result in the event of an accident. transmitting antenna must be externally mounted.
Looking away from the road or turning your
The improper installation of radios or telephones
attention away from your driving can cause an
or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting
accident and lead to serious personal injury
antenna inside the car may cause the warning
or death.
lights to come on.
When using your cellular telephone, you should
Improper installation of such equipment can create
always:
a discharged battery or excessive current draw
Give full attention to your driving - pull off the from added equipment.
road and park before making or answering a
If aftermarket systems are installed by non-deal-
call if traffic conditions so require; and
ership technicians or outside the selling dealer,
Keep both hands on the steering wheel - use problems may result. Installation of aftermarket
hands-free operation (if available) - pull off equipment is not covered under the New Car War-
the road and park before using a hand-held ranty.
telephone.
Consult your authorized Porsche dealer about
the installation of non Porsche approved
It is essential to observe the instructions of the equipment.
telephone manufacturer before putting the
telephone into operation.

188 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hands-free microphone
Hands-free microphones A installed at the factory
must be adapted to the type of telephone in use.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you.

Automatic car-wash
Unscrew external antennas before using an
automatic car-wash.

Controls, Instruments 189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 190 Controls, Instruments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Shifting Gears
Manual Transmission, Clutch ........................ 192
Tiptronic S .................................................. 193
Selector Lever Positions .............................. 195

Shifting Gears 191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Permitted engine speed
Warning!
You should change into a higher gear before
Risk of accident, resulting in serious personal the needle reaches the red mark on the
injury or death. tachometer, or ease off the accelerator.
Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
or other objects. Nonskid floor mats of the feed is interrupted.
correct size are available at your authorized
Porsche dealer. Caution!
Risk of engine damage (overrevving) when
shifting down to a lower gear.
Warning!
To avoid damage to the clutch and transmis- Take care not to exceed the maximum
sion: permitted engine speed when shifting down.

Always depress the clutch pedal fully when

changing gears. Make sure that the gearshift
lever is completely engaged.
Manual Transmission, Clutch
Only shift into reverse when the car has come
to a complete stop.
General information
The positions of the gears are shown on the shift
diagram on the gearshift lever. When shifting gears, always ensure that the
clutch pedal is fully depressed and the gear
has fully engaged.
Select reverse only when vehicle is stationary.
Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes. This will ensure
optimum use of engine power and engine
braking.
When reverse gear is selected and the ignition is
on, the backup lights are illuminated.

192 Shifting Gears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tiptronic S Release button
The release button (arrow) in the selector lever
Function prevents unintentional gear changes.
The Porsche Tiptronic is a five-speed transmission The release button must be pressed when shifting
with an “automatic” and a “manual” selection to position R or P.
mode.
In automatic selection mode (selector lever Starting
position D), gear changing is automatic. You can
The engine can be started only if the brake pedal is
change temporarily from automatic to manual
depressed and the selector lever is in position P or
mode using the rocker switches on the steering
N.
wheel.
In manual selection mode (selector lever Moving off
position M), you change gear using the rocker
Only select the desired position for moving off
switches on the steering wheel.
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
You can change between selector lever position D brake pedal is depressed.
and M as you wish while driving.
Since the vehicle creeps when in gear, do not
Note Transmission selector lever release the brake until you want to move off.
Take care not to operate the rocker switches on Changing the selector lever position After selecting a gear, do not accelerate until
the steering wheel inadvertently in either automatic you can feel that the gear is engaged.
or manual mode, thereby triggering undesired gear The selector lever is locked with the ignition key
changes. withdrawn.
The selector lever can be moved from position P or
Keylock position N only with:
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in selector – The ignition switched on
lever position P.
– The brake pedal pressed and
– The release button pressed

Shifting Gears 193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engage the selector lever correctly.
– The selector lever position is displayed
immediately after the correct position has
been detected.
– The current gear is shown after a brief
detection period.

If there is a fault in the transmission:

– The 4th gear display flashes.
– The warning “Tiptronic emergency run”
appears on the on-board computer.
Please observe the chapter ”REDUCED
DRIVING PROGRAM” on page 198.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Indicator for selector lever position and
engaged gear
Indication
When the engine is running, the selector lever
position and engaged gear are indicated.

If the selector lever is between two positions:

– The corresponding selector lever position in
the instrument cluster flashes for two seconds
and
– The warning “Selector lever not engaged”
appears in the on-board computer.

194 Shifting Gears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Selector Lever Positions D - Automatic selection mode Sport mode switched on
Please observe the chapter ”SPORT MODE” on
P - Parking lock Function page 78.
Engage parking lock only when vehicle is Select position D for “normal” driving. The
If the Sport mode program is switched on,
stationary. gears are shifted automatically according to the
Tiptronic switches to a sporty gear-changing map
accelerator position and speed.
Engage parking lock after applying the and shortens the shifting periods. Deceleration
handbrake and release it before releasing Depending on the way the vehicle is driven and downshifts are commenced earlier. Downshifts are
the handbrake. on the resistance (e.g. uphill), the gear-changing already carried out in the case of slight decelera-
points are shifted towards higher or lower engine- tions, even at higher engine speeds.
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in selector
speed ranges. The accelerator position, driving
lever position P.
speed, engine speed, longitudinal and lateral Shifting gears on the steering wheel
acceleration and the road profile all have an
R - Reverse gear With the rocker switches on the steering wheel, you
influence on the gear-changing characteristic.
can change temporarily from automatic selection
Select only if car is stationary and the brake is Unwanted upward shifts, e.g. before bends, are mode D to manual mode M.
applied. prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator
Example:
pedal.
N - Neutral – Shifting down before bends and on entering
Depending on lateral acceleration, upward
Selector lever position N must be selected for built-up areas.
changes on bends are not made until the engine-
towing or in car washes, for example. speed limit is reached. – Shifting down on downward slopes (engine
Only select the desired position for moving off braking).
Under braking, and depending on the amount
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the of deceleration, the Tiptronic changes down – Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
brake pedal is depressed. earlier. For subsequent cornering, the right gear – Selecting 1st gear for starting off.
is engaged when pressure is applied to the brakes
before the bend. The bend is taken in the right Manual selection mode remains engaged:
gear, and when you accelerate out of the bend you – for cornering (depending on the lateral
do not have to shift down. acceleration) and overrunning,
– when the vehicle is stationary (e.g. at a
Driving off
junction).
In 2nd gear, the vehicle moves off with the throttle
only slightly open. Move off in 1st gear with the The system leaves manual selection mode:
throttle open wider or when the engine is cold.

Shifting Gears 195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 – automatically after approx. 8 seconds (unless the accelerator is released to approx. 80% of the
cornering or overrunning), full-throttle position.
– if you depress the accelerator for kickdown,
– after moving off.

Temporary change-down
Conditions: Speed is higher than approx. 33 mph
(54 km/h).
Rapid acceleration. The Tiptronic temporarily
changes to the sportiest gear-changing map,
i.e. to the highest possible gear-changing
points. Correspondingly, the transmission
shifts down immediately by one or two gears.
Ending the function:
Release the accelerator markedly (by approx.
25%).
M - Manual selection mode
Kickdown
Function
The kickdown function is active in selector lever
The currently selected gear is retained when you
position D, even if you temporarily change to
change from D to M.
manual mode M using the rocker switches on
the steering wheel. If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map
suitable for your current driving style is selected
For optimum acceleration, e.g. when overtak-
and the appropriate gear is chosen.
ing, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
full-throttle point (kickdown).
The transmission shifts down depending on the
speed of travel and engine speed. Upward shifts
occur at the highest possible engine speeds.
These gear-changing speeds remain active until

196 Shifting Gears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PSM switched off and/or Sport mode switched Stopping
Warning! on For a brief stop (e.g. at a traffic light), leave
The kickdown function is not active in manual Please observe the chapter ”PORSCHE the selector lever in drive position and hold the
selection mode “M”. STABILITY MANAGEMENT (PSM)” on page vehicle with the brake pedal.
Therefore shift down manually when accelerat- 79. For a longer stop with the engine running,
ing (e.g. to overtake). Please observe the chapter ”SPORT MODE” on select position N (neutral) and hold vehicle
page 78. in position with the foot brake. Select lever
position D only when the foot brake pedal is
Two rocker switches in the upper steering-wheel If the PSM is switched off and/or Sport mode is
depressed.
spokes let you comfortably and reliably select the switched on, an automatic upshift does not occur
five forward speeds. when the engine speed limit is reached. Do not hold the car on a slope using the
accelerator. Use the brake pedal or the
Shifting up Cancelling upshift suppression handbrake instead.

Press upper part (+) of a rocker switch. This restriction can be cancelled for one gear Before leaving the vehicle, always apply the
change by depressing the accelerator to kickdown. handbrake and move the selector lever to
Shifting down If, for example, the engine speed limit is reached position P.
during overtaking and the automatic upshift does
Press lower part (-) of a rocker switch.
not occur, the transmission in this case shifts up by Parking
Depending on driving speed and engine speed, accelerating to kickdown.
Go easy on the accelerator!
you can shift up or down at any time. Gear changes
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
which would exceed the upper or lower engine- When parking or maneuvering in a small
full-throttle point (kickdown).
speed limit will not be executed by the controller. space, control the speed by careful use of
the footbrake.
You can change down two gears by quickly Manual mode failure
pressing the rocker switches twice.
If manual mode fails, the control electronics switch Driving in winter
If the engine-speed limit is reached, an automatic to automatic mode. In this event, the instrument
In wintry road conditions it is advisable to take
upward shift is performed or, just before idling cluster will display selector lever position D.
steep inclines in manual mode. This prevents the
speed is reached, a downward shift is performed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized occurrence of gear changes that could cause
Select an appropriately low gear on upward and Porsche dealer. wheelspin.
downward slopes. This will ensure optimum use of
engine power and engine braking.

Shifting Gears 197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tow-starting, towing 3. Start the engine. 2nd gear in selector position
D and reverse gear R are now available.
Please observe the chapter ”TOWING” on page
321. 4. Have the fault seen to immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Reduced driving program
A transmission fault is indicated by the following
symptoms:
– The 4th gear display on the instrument cluster
flashes.
– The warning “Tiptronic emergency run”
appears on the on-board computer.
– The transmission no longer shifts.

Warning!
Reverse gear lock monitoring is disabled in
the emergency running program. Damage
to the vehicle may result as well as loss of
control, if the vehicle is moving forward fast
enough to cause rear wheel lockup.
Do not shift into R while the vehicle is moving
forward.

Proceed as follows in the event of a transmission

fault:
1. Stop in a safe place.
2. Move selector lever to position P, switch the
ignition off and wait for 10 seconds.

198 Shifting Gears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mobile Roofs
Lifting/Sliding Roof ...................................... 200
Convertible Top ........................................... 204
Emergency operation of the convertible top ... 207
Windstop .................................................... 214
Hardtop ..................................................... 218
Targa ......................................................... 224
Roof Transport System ................................ 229

Mobile Roofs 199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lifting/Sliding Roof Opening the lifting/sliding roof - A

General information Press rear of rocker switch A until lifting/slid-

ing roof reaches the desired position.
Warning!
One-touch operation
Risk of injury when operating or automatically
Touch rear of rocker switch A. Lifting/sliding
closing the lifting/sliding roof.
roof opens to its end position. Stop it in any
Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured position by touching any button.
when the lifting/sliding roof is operated. Note
Always withdraw the ignition key when The lifting/sliding roof opens until it reaches the
leaving the vehicle. Uninformed persons (e.g. best position relative to noise. It can be opened
children) could injure themselves by operating fully, however, if you press the rocker switch again.
the lifting/sliding roof.
In case of danger, release the button immedi-
ately and operate the lifting/sliding roof in the
opposite direction.
Readiness for operation
– When the ignition is switched on (engine
switched on or off) or
– With doors closed and ignition key withdrawn,
but only until a door is first opened.

200 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Closing the lifting/sliding roof - B Lifting the lifting/sliding roof - C Emergency operation
Press front of rocker switch B until lifting/slid- Press center of rocker switch C until lift- Checking electrical fuses
ing roof reaches the desired position. ing/sliding roof reaches the desired position.
Warning!
One-touch operation One-touch operation
Risk of serious personal injury and damage
Touch front of rocker switch B. Lifting/sliding Touch the rocker switch C in the center.
to the lifting/sliding roof during emergency
roof closes to its end position. Stop it in any Lifting/sliding roof opens to its end position.
operation.
position by touching any button. Touch button again to stop in any position.
Do not operate the lifting/sliding roof with the
Lowering the lifting/sliding roof - B rocker switch during and after emergency
operation.
Press front of rocker switch B until lifting/slid-
ing roof reaches the desired position.
Before using emergency operation, please check
whether defective fuses are the cause of the
malfunction.
Please observe the chapter ”ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM” on page 292.

Mobile Roofs 201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Closing the sliding roof 3. Fold down the cover of the lifting/sliding roof 5. Press the Allen key into the drive axle, keep
drive at the rear. Remove the Allen key (arrow) it pressed and turn it clockwise until the
1. Carefully unclip both covers A with a screwdriv-
from its holder. lifting/sliding roof is closed.
er. If the car is equipped with HomeLink, the
HomeLink buttons must be carefully unclipped 4. Insert the Allen key into the drive axle. 6. Remove the Allen key. Close the cover and
instead of the covers. screw in the screws.
2. Unscrew the two screws B. 7. Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

Caution!
Risk of damage to the lifting/sliding roof.
After emergency operation, do not operate the
lifting/sliding roof using the rocker switch.

202 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Drive slowly to an authorized Porsche dealer in
order to have the fault remedied.

Mobile Roofs 203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Convertible Top Avoid frequent operation of the convertible top automatically if convertible top operation is not
with the engine off; the vehicle battery would interrupted when the convertible top reaches its
General information be unintentionally discharged rapidly. final position.
Brief operating instructions can be found on the Drive only with the convertible top fully open or
back side of the driver’s sun visor. closed (end positions). Preconditions for operation of the
When opening or closing the convertible top,
convertible top
Please observe the chapter ”CAR CARE
INSTRUCTIONS” on page 257. ensure there is sufficient clearance above the – The ignition must be switched on (engine
convertible top (e.g. in the garage). running or off),
Warning! To prevent damp stains and abrasions, only – the engine compartment lid must be closed,
open the convertible top in a dry, clean state. – the speed must be below approx. 30 mph
When opening or closing the convertible
top, serious personal injury may occur if a Park your car in the shade whenever possible, (50 km/h). If this maximum speed is exceed-
person’s body parts are near or in the way as the fabric, rubber material and color can be ed, the opening/closing procedure of the
of the convertible top mechanism’s moving harmed by long exposure to sunlight. convertible top will be interrupted.
parts. The convertible top may only be actuated Reduce speed. Press button again. The
Make absolutely sure that nobody can be during driving on even surfaces. opening/closing process is ended.
injured by the convertible-top mechanism or The convertible top must not be used
the convertible-top compartment lid. with strong counter wind (over approx.
50 mph/80 km/h).

Do not operate convertible top: Door windows and side windows

The side windows are lowered automatically when
– At temperatures below 32°F (0°C ).
the convertible top is opened. The door windows
– When one side of the car is on a curb, a hoist close automatically if convertible top operation is
or a jack. not interrupted when the convertible top reaches
– When items of luggage or other objects hinder its final position. When the door windows are
the convertible top movement. closed, the rear side windows can also be closed.
When opening the door windows, the rear windows
– With the rollbars extended. open automatically.
The side windows are lowered automatically when
the convertible top is closed. All windows close

204 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In order to abort convertible top operation in
the event of danger, immediately release the
rocker switch.

Pull the rocker switch back and hold without

interruption until the convertible top is in the
final position or until the door windows are
in the desired position. The message on
the on-board computer goes out. In case of
danger, release the rocker switch. Convertible
top operation stops.
Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS
ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE
ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143.

Opening convertible top Closing convertible top

Warning!
Warning!
Risk of injury and damage when operating the
Risk of injury and damage when operating the
convertible top.
convertible top.
Make absolutely sure that nobody can be
Make absolutely sure that nobody can be
injured by the convertible-top mechanism or
injured by the convertible-top mechanism or
the convertible-top compartment lid.
the convertible-top compartment lid.
Before opening the convertible top, make sure
Keep the lids of the make-up mirrors in the sun
that there are no objects behind the rear seats.
visors closed when closing the convertible top.

Mobile Roofs 205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In order to abort convertible top operation in Messages in on-board computer
the event of danger, immediately release the
rocker switch. Rear lid

Push the rocker switch forward and hold If the engine compartment lid is open when
without interruption until the convertible top activating the convertible top, a message appears
is in the final position or until the door windows in the on-board computer. The convertible top
are in the desired position. The message on cannot be opened.
the on-board computer goes out. In case of
Close engine compartment lid.
danger, release the rocker switch. Convertible
top operation stops.
Convertible top status
Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS
ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE
ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143. Please observe the chapter ”WARNINGS
ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE
ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on page 143.

If the convertible top does not lock in the

windshield frame
Open convertible top again, start the engine
and close the convertible top again using
the rocker switch. Assist with the closing
process by grasping the convertible top at the
handhold and pulling it toward the windshield
frame (arrow).

206 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency operation of the convertible
top
Before emergency operation

Warning!
There is danger of injury and damage during
emergency operation. There is danger
of crushing or trapping body parts at all
movable convertible top parts which could
cause serious personal injury.
Take great care when performing emergency
operation.
Do not operate the convertible top during and
after emergency operation.

Please observe the chapter ”LUGGAGE Opening convertible top compartment lid “D”
Before performing emergency operation, COMPARTMENT (VEHICLES WITH FOUR-
please check: Was the ignition switched on 1. Take red Allen key B out of its holder.
WHEEL DRIVE)” on page 179.
and was the engine compartment lid closed 2. Put handle of screwdriver onto Allen key B.
during operation of the convertible top with the Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
Insert Allen key into the drive axle C and turn
rocker switch? Are electrical fuses defective? it counterclockwise (in direction of the arrow)
Removing rear wall lining until the convertible top compartment lid D is
Please observe the chapter ”ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM” on page 292. 1. Unscrew screws A from the rear wall lining. fully open. Remove the Allen key.
Pull out and reposition the screwdriver insert if
Remove the ignition key so that the convertible necessary.
top is not operated unintentionally.
2. Grasp the rear wall lining at the cut-outs for the
Take screwdriver out of the tool kit. safety belts and press downward. Pull rear wall
Please observe the chapter ”LUGGAGE lining forward and lift up and out.
COMPARTMENT (VEHICLES WITHOUT FOUR-
WHEEL DRIVE)” on page 177.

Mobile Roofs 207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Opening side aps “F” 3. Insert Allen key B into the drive axle for the left
Warning! side flap F. Turn Allen key counterclockwise (in
1. Remove ignition key.
The Allen key can rotate or y out and thereby direction of arrow) until the side flap F is fully
cause serious personal injury if the converti- 2. Use the screwdriver to remove plastic lid E open (perceptible stop).
ble top is actuated. from the lining from behind.
4. Repeat procedure with the right side flap.
Always remove the Allen key B from the drive Remove the Allen key.
axle C before operating the convertible top.

When you have opened the convertible top

compartment lid, try to close the convertible
top using the rocker switch. If the convertible
top cannot be closed, continue with emergency
operation.

208 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning!
The Allen key can rotate or y out and thereby
cause serious personal injury if the converti-
ble top is actuated.
Always remove the Allen key B from the drive
axle of the side flap before operating the
convertible top.

When you have opened the side flaps, try to

close the convertible top using the rocker
switch. If the convertible top cannot be closed,
continue with emergency operation.

Closing convertible top 2. Get behind the front seats and grasp the
convertible top in the middle.
1. Insert Allen key B through hole G and into the
hydraulic valve. Turn Allen key B counterclock-
wise by approx. 1 revolution. Always remove
Allen key B.

Mobile Roofs 209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Close the convertible top until it reaches its The convertible top lock with the locking hook is
highest position. fitted on the convertible top. Perform the work
on the convertible top lock when standing on the
right-hand side of the vehicle.

210 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Extending the locking hook “H” 2. Take the Allen key K out of the oddments tray 5. Pull the convertible top all the way forward to
between the front seats. the windshield.
1. Pull the plastic lid J down on the front corners.
Push the lid carefully to the rear and take it off. 3. Insert the Allen key K into the opening L and
turn in the direction of arrow “open” until
Locking the locking hook “H” in the
marked resistance can be felt. The locking windscreen frame
hook H is now extended. When locking the convertible top, make
4. Pull out the Allen key K. sure that the locking hook engages in the
windshield frame. Pull the convertible top
to the windshield frame if necessary. The
centering journals M must be retracted into
the mounting in the windshield frame.

Mobile Roofs 211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Insert the Allen key again. Turn in the direction Mounting the plastic lid Closing the convertible-top compartment lid
of arrow “close” until you can feel marked
Push the plastic lid over the convertible top
resistance and the convertible top is complete- Warning!
locking mechanism from behind. The lid must
ly locked.
engage centred in the guide N. Push the lid
Risk of pinching when closing the convertible-
2. Remove the Allen key. upwards at its front edge and engage. top compartment lid.

Warning! Place your hands on the convertible-top

compartment lid when pushing.
Risk of injury in an accident.
Do not drive without the plastic lid mounted. 1. Stand behind the vehicle.
2. Grasp the convertible-top compartment
lid above the brake light and push forward
against resistance which can be felt until it is
completely closed.

212 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Caution!
Risk of damage to the convertible top.
After emergency operation, do not operate the
convertible top using the rocker switch.
Drive slowly to an authorized Porsche dealer in
order to have the fault remedied.

Mobile Roofs 213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Caution!
Risk of damage to the windstop
Make sure that the windstop is not damaged
by items of luggage or objects in the luggage
compartment.
Do not place any objects on the windstop.
Do not store any sharp-edged objects under
the installed windstop.
Do not damage the windstop during seat
adjustment and when folding back the front-
seat backrests. Adjust seat so that the seat
backrest does not touch the windstop.
Do not fold up the rear seat backrests with the
windstop installed.
Example: Mount for 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Remove windstop before fitting a hardtop. 2. Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
Windstop Please observe the chapter ”REAR SEAT
BACKRESTS” on page 44.
General information Installing the windstop 3. Unfold the windstop until it can be felt to
The windstop is stowed in a protective bag in the 1. Open zipper of the protective bag. Take the engage in the hinges at the top and bottom.
luggage compartment. windstop out of the luggage compartment.
The protective bag is fastened with a Velcro strip in
the luggage compartment.

214 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Lock open
4. Check whether the lock of the windstop lower
B - Lock closed
section is engaged. Press lock together if
necessary (arrows).
5. Check whether the two red locking handles
are in position A (open). Open the lock if
necessary. To do this, push the locking
handles inward as far as they will go and swivel
to the side (arrow).

Mobile Roofs 215

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Insert fastening tabs C of the windstop into the
guides of the safety belts. Make sure that the
plastic peg E engages in the center guide of
the windstop.
7. Push red locking handles inward and swivel
downward. Spring force pushes the square
pins of the locks into the receivers D in the side
trim panels. Check whether the square pins
are correctly engaged.

216 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Lock open
8. Lift upper section of windstop if required. 4. Fold the windstop together so that the split
B - Lock closed
windstop lower section is on the outside.
5. Place windstop in the protective bag in the
Removing the windstop
luggage compartment and seal the zipper of
1. Fold back upper section of windstop. the protective bag.

2. Move both red locking handles to position A Please observe the chapter ”INSTALLING THE
(open). WINDSTOP ” on page 214.

3. Pull windstop out of the guides of the safety

belts.

Mobile Roofs 217

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hardtop
Hardtop storage
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to give
advice about correct hardtop storage.
Since the convertible top stays open for a long
time, it must be absolutely dry and clean before
being opened to install the hardtop. This prevents
damp stains and abrasion damage.
Make sure that the hardtop is placed on a
clean, soft surface.

Removing the hardtop 3. Press red locking button A of the front locking
lever. Fully open locking lever B.
1. Open all four side windows.
2. Pull off plastic cover of the front hardtop lock
(arrow).

218 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Take unlocking handle D from the storage tray 6. Insert unlocking handle D into one of the 9. Together with a second person on the other
between the front seats. rear hardtop locks. Unscrew the fastening side, grasp the hardtop at points E and F.
screw approx. 2 turns, pull off the handle,
5. Position unlocking handle D on the dot
and completely unscrew the screw by hand Warning!
marking. Carefully remove the plastic covers
(approx. 8 turns).
C on both sides of the hardtop.
Danger of pinching ngers or hands at the
7. Pull out the fastening screw up to the stop
points “F”.
and turn it anticlockwise 2 turns (to prevent
damage). Evenly lift the hardtop at both sides.
8. Repeat procedure on the other side of the
hardtop. 10. First pull the hardtop rearward and up out of
the locking elements. Carefully lift the hardtop
up and over the vehicle to the rear.

Mobile Roofs 219

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Take unlocking handle D from the storage tray
between the front seats. Position unlocking
handle D on the point marking. Carefully
remove both plastic covers C on both sides
of the hardtop.

11. Carefully remove both protection covers J to Putting on the hardtop

the rear.
12. Fit both plastic covers C into the trim panel. Caution!
The marking point must point to the rear. Risk of damage to the windstop and hardtop.
These covers are also used with the hardtop.
Always remove the windstop before fitting the
13. Close front locking lever. Push on plastic cover
hardtop.
of the front hardtop lock.
Please observe the chapter ”WINDSTOP” on
page 214.

1. Open all four side windows and convertible

top.

220 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Carefully fit both protective covers J into the 4. Pull off plastic cover of the front hardtop lock. 5. Press red lock button of the front locking lever.
trim panel from behind. Fully open locking lever.

Mobile Roofs 221

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Check whether the rear screw connections 9. First push the hardtop completely into the
on the hardtop are loosened (turn it 2 turns guides on the windshield frame. Then carefully
clockwise). lower the hardtop into the locking elements at
the rear.
7. Together with a second person on the other
side, grasp the hardtop at points E and F.
Caution!
8. Carefully lift the hardtop up and over the
vehicle from behind. Danger of damage due to inadvertent oper-
ation of the convertible top with the hardtop
Warning! tted.

Danger of pinching ngers or hands at the Make sure that the front locking lever G is
points “F”. always correctly locked. This disables the
convertible top drive.
Evenly lower the hardtop at both sides.

222 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10. Swivel front locking lever G to the rear. The 12. Tighten the fastening screw by hand. Then 14. Fit both plastic covers C into the trim panels of
latching hook H must engage in the windshield tighten the fastening screw with the unlocking the rear hardtop locking elements so that the
frame (arrow). The white marking line J on the handle D (tightening torque 34 ft.lb. (46 Nm)). marking points are opposite each other.
red locking button must become visible when
13. Repeat procedure on the other side of the 15. Store unlocking handle in storage tray
the hardtop is locked properly.
hardtop. between the front seats.
11. Push on plastic cover of the front hardtop lock.

Mobile Roofs 223

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Targa
Warning!
General information Risk of injury and damage.
This roof type is equipped with the following special Before operating the roller blind, ensure that
features: there are no persons or objects in the range of
– Roller blind movement.
– Sliding glass roof
– Glass rear hatch
Opening the roller blind to the desired position
Warning! Pull the rocker switch to the first stage (1)
and hold it until the roller blind has reached the
Risk of injury when operating all components desired position.
of the Targa roof, especially when closing the
sliding glass roof. Opening the roller blind fully (one-touch
Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured operation)
when the roof components are actuated. Tap the rocker switch to the first stage (1).
Roller blind The roller blind moves to its final position.
Always withdraw the ignition key when
leaving the vehicle. Uninformed persons (e.g. Touch the rocker switch again to stop in any
Readiness for operation position.
children) could injure themselves by operating
the sliding glass roof, the roller blind or the – With the ignition switched on (engine on or off)
glass rear hatch. or Closing the roller blind to the desired position
In case of danger, release the button imme- – When door is closed and ignition key with- Push the rocker switch to the first stage (2)
diately and operate the sliding glass roof or drawn, but only until door is first opened. and hold it until the roller blind has reached the
roller blind in the opposite direction. desired position.
The roller blind can be operated independently of
the sliding glass roof position.

224 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Closing the roller blind fully (one-touch Opening sliding glass roof
operation)
Tap the rocker switch to the first stage (2). Warning!
The roller blind moves to its final position. Risk of injury and damage.
Touch the rocker switch again to stop in any
position. Before opening the sliding glass roof, ensure
that there are no persons or objects in the
range of movement.

Pull the rocker switch to the second stage

(3) and hold it until the sliding glass roof has
reached the desired position.

Closing the sliding glass roof

Warning!

Sliding glass roof Risk of injury and damage.

Before closing the sliding glass roof, ensure
Readiness for operation
that there are no persons or objects in the
– With ignition switched on (engine on or off) or range of movement.
– When door is closed and ignition key with-
drawn, but only until door is first opened. Push the rocker switch to the second stage
– The glass rear hatch must be closed. (4) and hold it until the sliding glass roof has
reached the desired position.

Mobile Roofs 225

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Closing glass rear hatch Message in on-board computer

Warning! Glass rear hatch

A message appears on the on-board computer if
Risk of pinching. The glass rear hatch is
the glass rear hatch is not completely closed.
automatically pulled into the lock and locked.
Fully close the glass rear hatch.
Ensure that your fingers are not caught under
the glass rear hatch.

Place your hand on the glass rear hatch.

Lower the glass rear hatch until it is automati-
cally closed and locked.

Glass rear hatch

Opening the glass rear hatch
The sliding glass roof must be closed.
To unlock it, operate the pull-button A beside
the driver’s seat, or
push the button for the glass rear hatch on the
remote control.
Please observe the chapter ”KEY WITH RADIO
REMOTE CONTROL” on page 23.
Lift glass rear hatch.
The interior light is switched on when the glass rear
hatch is unlocked.

226 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency operation of sliding glass roof
Closing the sliding glass roof
Before using emergency operation, please
check whether the fuses may be defective.
Please observe the chapter ”ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM” on page 292.

Warning!
Risk of injury and damage.
Do not operate the sliding glass roof with the
rocker switch during and after emergency
operation.

1. Remove ignition key. You will find the Allen keys for emergency operation
on the back on the lining A.
2. Move the front passenger seat forward and
fold the backrest forward. Fold the rear seat 4. Take both Allen keys B out of their holder.
backrests forward.
3. Grasp under the rear-wall lining A with your
hands. Forcefully pull the rear-wall lining A
forward.

Mobile Roofs 227

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Insert the Allen keys into the drive axles C of
the electric motors.
6. Press both Allen keys into the drive axles
until they engage audibly. This requires a
somewhat greater effort.
7. Keep both Allen keys pressed in and turn them
to the right. Keep turning until the sliding roof
is closed.
8. Remove the Allen keys. Close the rear-wall
lining.
9. Please have the fault remedied at an author-
ized Porsche dealer.

228 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Roof Transport System Fix and secure every item to the basic carrier
with a rope or lashing strap (do not use elastic
Coupc only rubber tensioners).
Please follow the separate instructions for Before every trip, and at regular intervals
fitting the Roof Transport System. during long trips, check that Roof Transport
System and load are secure. Re-tighten if
Only use Roof Transport Systems from the
necessary and secure additionally by locking.
Porsche Tequipment product range or Roof
Transport Systems which have been tested When the Roof Transport System is loaded, the
and approved for your car by Porsche. Fitting maximum speed depends on the nature, size
normal commercially available luggage racks and weight of the load being carried.
is not possible. Driving, braking and steering behavior change
The Porsche Roof Transport System allows you due to the higher center of gravity and the
to carry various sports and hobby equipment. Your greater wind-resistant area. You should adapt
authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to tell your driving style appropriately.
you about the various different uses of the Roof Since fuel consumption and noise are
Transport System. increased with the Roof Transport System
fitted, it should not remain on the vehicle if not
Caution! in use.

Completely remove the Roof Transport

System before using an automatic car wash -
risk of damage to the vehicle!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted
payload, the maximum permitted gross weight
and the maximum permitted axle loads.
Please observe the chapter ”TECHNICAL
DATA” on page 328.
Distribute load evenly, with heavy items as low
as possible. Items of luggage must not project
beyond the side of the load area.

Mobile Roofs 229

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 230 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance, Car Care
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working on your
Vehicle ....................................................... 232
Coolant Level .............................................. 233
Engine Oil ................................................... 235
Engine Oil Level ........................................... 236
Engine Oil Recommendation ......................... 238
Brake Fluid Level ......................................... 240
Fuel Economy ............................................. 242
Operating your Porsche in other Countries ..... 243
Fuel ........................................................... 244
Portable fuel containers ............................... 245
Fuel Recommendations ................................ 246
Emission Control System ............................. 247
How Emission Control Works ........................ 248
Fuel Evaporation Control .............................. 249
Washer Fluid ............................................... 250
Power Steering ........................................... 251
Filter .......................................................... 252
Manual Transmission Oil ............................... 253
Automatic Transmission Fluid ........................ 254
Wiper Blades .............................................. 255
Car Care Instructions ................................... 257

Maintenance, Car Care 231

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Exercise Extreme Caution when In particular, be very careful to ensure that Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), problems in the operation of the car. If in
Working on your Vehicle jewelry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot doubt about any servicing, have it done by
get caught in the engine-compartment your authorized Porsche dealer. Improper
Danger! blower, fan, belts or other moving parts. The maintenance during the warranty period may
radiator and radiator fans are in the front of affect your Porsche warranty coverage.
Ignoring the following instructions may cause the car. The engine-compartment blower
serious personal injury or death. Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid
is mounted on the engine-compartment lid.
or coolant, are hazardous to your health. Keep
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle The engine-compartment blower can start or
these fluids out of children’s reach and dispose
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not continue running as a function of temperature,
of them in accordance with the appropriate
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do even with the engine switched off. Carry out
regulations.
not attempt the adjustments described on the work in these areas only with the engine off,
the ignition switched off, and exercise extreme Some countries require additional tools and
following pages. This caution also applies to
caution. special spare parts to be carried in your
the entire vehicle.
vehicle. Please make enquiries before driving
Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic
abroad.
ventilated area. ignition system. When the ignition is on,
high voltage is present in all wires connected
Ensure that there are no open flames in with the ignition system; therefore, exercise
the area of your vehicle at any time when extreme caution when working on any part of Power measurements
fuel fumes might be present. Be especially the engine while the ignition is on or the engine
cautious of such devices such as hot water Power measurements on dynamometers are not
is running.
heaters which ignite a flame intermittently. approved by Porsche.
Always support your car with safety stands if it
Before working on any part in the engine com- is necessary to work under the car.
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment When working under the car without safety
components can burn skin on contact. stands but with the wheels on the ground,
make sure the car is on level ground, the
Be alert and cautious around engine at all wheels are blocked, and that the engine
times while the engine is running. If work has cannot be started. Remove the ignition key.
to be performed with the engine running,
always set the parking brake, and make Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
sure the shift lever is in neutral position or the battery or fuel. Keep a fire extinguisher
the selector lever in position P or N. close at hand.

232 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Checking coolant level Please observe the chapter ”COOLING
SYSTEM” on page 101.
The expansion tank with its filler orifice is on the
left-hand side of the engine compartment. 2. Cover the expansion tank cap with a thick
rag. Open cap slowly and carefully and allow
Check the coolant level regularly through the
overpressure to escape. Then unscrew cap
transparent expansion tank.
completely.
When the engine is cold and the car is level the
3. Only add a mixture of antifreeze and water
fluid level must lie between the “MIN” and “MAX”
in equal parts, and do not exceed the “MAX”
markings.
mark.
Topping off coolant Antifreeze in coolant:
50% gives protection down to -31°F /-35°C
60% gives protection down to -58°F /-50°C
Warning!
4. Screw cap firmly on.
Danger of serious personal injury or death
from scalding. Coolant is hazardous to your If in an emergency pure water has been added,
health, and may be fatal if swallowed. the mix ratio must be corrected at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Coolant Level Do not open the cap of the expansion tank
Marked loss of coolant indicates leakage in the
while the engine is hot.
cooling system. The cause should immediately be
General information Allow the engine to cool down before opening remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Please observe the chapter ”EXERCISE the cap and protect your hands, arms and face
from any possible escape of hot coolant.
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON Engine-compartment blower, radiator fan
YOUR VEHICLE” on page 232. Keep coolant out of children’s reach.
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of the
The cooling system is filled at the factory with Also, keep coolant away from your pets. They car. The engine-compartment blower is mounted
a permanent coolant. It provides year-round can be attracted to it should there be a spill, on the engine compartment lid.
protection from corrosion and freezing down to or to used coolant left in an open container.
-31°F /-35°C . Coolant can be deadly to pets if consumed.
Only use antifreeze authorized by Porsche.
1. Switch engine off and let it cool.

Maintenance, Car Care 233

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning!
Risk of injury. After the engine is switched
off, the engine-compartment temperature
is monitored for approx. 30 minutes. During
this period, and depending on temperature,
the engine-compartment blower may contin-
ue to run or start to run.
Carry out work in these areas only with the
engine off, the ignition off, and exercise
extreme caution.

Warning!
Risk of injury. The radiator fans in the front
end of the car may be operating or unex-
pectedly start operating when the engine is
switched on.
Carry out work in these areas only with the
engine switched off.

234 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Oil Therefore, the engine oil should be checked
regularly and kept at the required level.
Engine oil consumption – Make it a habit to have the engine oil level
It is normal for your engine to consume oil. The checked at every refueling.
rate of oil consumption depends on the quality – The oil pressure warning light is not an oil
and viscosity of oil, the speed at which the engine level indicator. The oil pressure warning light
is operated, the climate, road conditions as well indicates serious engine damage may be
as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the occuring when lit, if engine rpm is above idle
lubricant. speed.
If the vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and
consumes a normal amount of oil, the engine oil
measurement may not show any drop in the oil
level at all, even after 600 miles (1,000 km) or
more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear
that the oil level has not changed. The diluting
ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is
driven at high speeds, as on an expressway,
making it then appear that oil is excessively
consumed after driving at high speeds.
If the conditions you drive your vehicle in are dusty,
humid, or hot, the frequency of the oil change
intervals should be greater.
If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed,
climatic conditions are warm, and the load is
high, the oil should be checked more frequently,
as driving conditions will determine the rate of oil
consumption.
– The engine in your vehicle depends on oil
to lubricate and cool all of its moving parts.

Maintenance, Car Care 235

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Oil Level
Warning!
Checking the oil level Engine oil is hazardous to your health and
Please observe the chapter ”EXERCISE may be fatal if swallowed.
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON Keep engine oil out of children’s reach.
YOUR VEHICLE” on page 232.
Regularly check the oil level using the on-board
computer after the vehicle is refuelled. Warning!
Please observe the chapter ”OIL DISPLAY AND Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL” caused cancer in laboratory animals.
on page 136.
Always protect your skin by washing thorough-
The difference between the minimum and max-
ly with soap and water.
imum marks on the segment display is approx.
1.2 liters. Each segment of the display corre-
sponds to approx. 0.4 liter.

Topping off engine oil 1. The on-board computer indicates how much oil
must be added.
Warning! 2. Pull oil filler tube upwards out of its holder.
Risk of burning from hot parts in engine
compartment. Risk of injury by rotating
parts. The engine compartment blower on
the engine compartment lid can start up even
with engine off.
Exercise extrem caution when working in the
engine compartment.
Top off engine oil only with the engine off.

236 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Unscrew cap of the oil filler opening.
4. Add at most 0.5 quarts (0.5 liter) of engine oil
at a time.
5. Measure oil level again with the on-board
computer.
6. Add more engine oil if necessary. Never add
more engine oil than required to reach the
max. mark.
7. Carefully close cap of the oil filler opening.
8. Push oil filler tube into its holder until it snaps
into place.

Maintenance, Car Care 237

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Oil Recommendation
Recommended oil viscosity ranges dependent on ambient temperatures

Ambient temperature seasonal SAE Viscosity Range engine oils

generally above -13F/-25C SAE 0W-40, 5W-40, 5W-50 approved by Porsche

generally below -13F/-25C SAE 0W-40 approved by Porsche

Suitable oils are:

Use only engine oils tested and approved by Porsche (Porsche approval list). Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you.
You will find a sticker in the engine compartment which provides information (manufacturer) about the initial factory filling of your engine.
Generally you can find the manufacturer suggestions on the oil containers or as a bulletin on the market.

Oil change you should, if possible, use the same oil brand Engine oil performance class
if it becomes necessary to top up between oil
The engine oil has to be changed at the intervals Engine oil is not only a lubricant, but also serves to
changes.
listed in your Maintenance Schedule. keep the engine clean, to neutralize the dirt which
Porsche engines have long intervals between penetrates into the engine through combustion
Please observe the chapter ”CAPACITIES” on
oil changes. You can make best use of these and to protect the engine against corrosion. To
page 335.
long oil change intervals by using multigrade oils perform these functions, the oil is provided with
We recommend that you have the engine oil since these are largely independent of seasonal additives which have been specially developed
changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the fluctuations in temperature. for these functions. The efficiency of an oil is
required oils and the necessary filling equipment. expressed, for example, by the API, ILSAC or ACEA
If your vehicle is used frequently in stop-and-go
If you suspect an oil leak in the engine have your classifications.
traffic in cold weather, the engine will not always
dealer check it out immediately. be completely warmed up. Condensation from
products of combustion may accumulate in the Viscosity
All current engine oils are compatible with each
other, i. e. when making an oil change it is not oil. In this case, it is advisable to change the oil Like all liquids, engine oil is viscous when cold,
necessary to flush the engine if you wish to use a more frequently so that your engine once again has and thin-bodied when warm. The viscosity of an oil
different brand or grade of oil. Since, however, 100% efficient engine oil. is expressed by its SAE class. For cold viscosity
each brand of oil has a special composition, (measured at temperatures below 32°F /0°C )

238 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 the SAE class is given as a number and the letter
“W” (as in winter), for hot viscosity (measured at
212°F /100°C ) the SAE class is given only as a
number.
The viscosity of an oil is, therefore, always the
same if it has the same number of an SAE class.
Oils with two viscosities are called multigrade oils;
oils with only one viscosity are termed single-grade
oils.
Single-grade oils cannot be used in your engine.
The viscosity of the engine oil for your Porsche has
to be selected according to the ambient tempera-
ture given in the engine oil recommendation table.

Maintenance, Car Care 239

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Brake Fluid Level
Use of brake uid
Please observe the chapter ”EXERCISE
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON
YOUR VEHICLE” on page 232.
Use only new (unused) Original Porsche
brake uid.

Warning!
Brake uid is hazardous to your health, and
may be fatal if swallowed. Brake uid also
attacks paintwork.
Keep brake fluid out of children’s reach.
Take care while topping off brake fluid not to Example: 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
soil the luggage compartment or items of A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear
luggage. and automatic readjustment of the disc brakes is
Checking the brake uid level
normal. If, however, the fluid level falls markedly or
The reservoir for the hydraulic braking and clutch below the minimum mark, the braking system may
systems is located in the luggage compartment. have developed a leak.
1. Open and remove cover flap A. Have the brake system checked without delay
2. Regularly check the brake-fluid level on the at an authorized Porsche dealer.
transparent expansion tank through the
window B. The fluid level should always lie Changing the brake uid
between the minimum and maximum marks. Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
time. This accumulation of water lowers the boiling
point and, under certain operating conditions,
can affect the braking performance. Therefore
have the brake fluid changed in accordance

240 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 with the change intervals stated in the brochure Warning lights
“Maintenance”.
Indication
Warning light USA

Warning light Canada

– The warning lights on the instrument panel

and on the on-board computer indicate an
insufficient brake fluid level.
– If the warning light lights up on the instrument
panel and the warning message appears on
the on-board computer in combination with a
larger pedal travel, a brake circuit may have
failed.

If the warning lights should light up when

driving:
Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Do not continue driving. Consult an authorized
Porsche dealer.

Maintenance, Car Care 241

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuel Economy Organize your trips to take in several errands
in one trip.
Fuel economy will vary depending on where,
All electrical accessories contribute to
when and how you drive, optional equipment
increased fuel consumption.
installed, and the general condition of your
car. A car tuned to specications and correct- Only switch on the air conditioning when
ly maintained, will help you to achieve optimal necessary.
fuel economy.
Do not drive with the Roof Transport System
Have your vehicle tuned to specifications. Air mounted unless you need it.
cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper
The EPA estimated miles per gallon (mpg)
engine “breathing”. Battery should be fully
is to be used for comparison purposes,
charged. Wheels should be properly aligned.
actual mileage may be different from the
Tires should be inflated to the correct pres-
estimated mpg, depending on your driving
sure.
speed, weather conditions and trip length.
Always monitor your fuel consumption. Your actual highway mileage will probably be
less than the estimated mpg.
Drive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed
as much as possible. Please observe all local and national speed
limits.
Avoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops.
Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without
lugging the engine will help save fuel.
Prolonged “warm up” idling wastes gas. Start
the vehicle just before you are ready to drive.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly.
Switch off the engine if stationary for longer
periods.
Any additional weight carried in the vehicle
reduces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to a
minimum and remove all unnecessary items.

242 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating your Porsche in other
Countries
Government regulations in the United States and
Canada require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards.
Therefore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ
from vehicles sold in other countries.
If you plan to take your Porsche outside the
continental limits of the United States or Canada,
there is the possibility that
– unleaded fuel may not be available;
– unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Excessive engine knock and
serious damage to both engine and catalytic
converters could result;
– service may be inadequate due to lack of
proper service facilities, tools or diagnostic
equipment;
– replacement parts may not be available or very
difficult to get.
Porsche cannot be responsible for the
mechanical damage that could result
because of inadequate fuel, service or parts
availability.
If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want
to bring it back home, be sure to find out about
shipping and forwarding requirements, as well as
current import and customs regulations.

Maintenance, Car Care 243

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuel
General information

Warning!
Fuel is highly ammable and harmful to
health.
Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling fuel.
Avoid contact with skin or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapors.

Warning!
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine: Check engine warning light The filler flap is centrally locked along with the
other locks.
Never drive the tank completely out of fuel. If the warning lights in the instrument panel and
on-board computer come on and remain on while If there is a defect in the automatic unlocking
Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning driving, it suggests: system:
lights have come on.
– an improperly fastened tank cap or Open the passenger door.
– refueling with engine running. Pull the ring in the right-hand door aperture
Please observe the chapter ”EMISSION
(arrow).
CONTROL SYSTEM” on page 247.
Opening the ller ap
Please observe the chapter ”FUEL ECONOMY”
The filler opening is under the filler flap in the front
on page 242.
right fender.
Please observe the chapter ”LEVEL GAUGE”
With the vehicle unlocked, press on the front
on page 103.
part of the filler flap (arrow) to open the flap.

244 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Insert fuel-hose nozzle fully into the filler neck Portable fuel containers
with the handle of the fuel-hose nozzle facing
down.
Danger!
4. Do not add further fuel once the correctly
operated automatic fuel-hose nozzle has Portable fuel containers, full or partially
switched off. Fuel could spray or could run empty, may leak causing an explosion, or
over in warm temperatures. result in re in case of an accident.

5. Replace the tank cap immediately after Never carry additional fuel in portable contain-
refueling and turn it until you hear it and feel ers in your vehicle.
it engage.
If you lose the tank cap, you must replace
it only with an original part to reduce the
possibility of a re in the event of a collision.
Note
The oil level is automatically measured during
refuelling.
Refueling
Please observe the chapter ”OIL DISPLAY AND
Fuel tank capacity is listed under “Capacities”. MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
Porsche does not recommend the use of fuel on page 136.
additives.
Fuel is highly ammable and harmful to
health.
Please observe the chapter ”CAPACITIES” on
page 335.
1. Important: Stop the engine and switch off the
ignition.
2. Slowly unscrew the tank cap. Hang the tank
cap on the plastic strap of the filler flap.

Maintenance, Car Care 245

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuel Recommendations Octane ratings – Deterioration of driveability and performance.
Octane rating indicates a fuel’s ability to resist – Substantially reduced fuel economy.
Your Porsche is equipped with catalytic converters
detonation. Therefore, buying the correct octane
and must use UNLEADED FUEL ONLY. – Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially
gas is important to prevent engine “damage”.
at high altitude or at high temperature.
Your engine is designed to provide optimum
The RON octane rating is based on the research
performance and fuel economy using unleaded – Engine malfunction or stalling.
method. The CLC (U.S. Cost of Living Council
premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON
octane rating) or AKI ( antiknock index) octane
(93 CLC or AKI). Porsche therefore recommends
rating usually displayed on U.S. fuel pumps is
Fuels containing MMT
the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
calculated as research octane number plus motor Some North American fuels contain an octane
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may octane number, divided by 2, that is written as: enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
not always be available. Be assured that your manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
vehicle will operate properly on unleaded premium RON + MON R+M If such fuels are used, your emission control
fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON or
2 2 system performance may be negatively affected.
(90 CLC or AKI), since the engine’s “Electronic
Octane™ knock control” will adapt the ignition The check engine warning light on your instrument
timing, if necessary. The CLC or AKI octane rating is usually lower than panel may turn on. If this occurs, Porsche recom-
the RON rating: mends you stop using fuels containing MMT.
The use of UNLEADED FUEL ONLY is critically
important to the life of the catalytic convert- For example: 95 RON equals 90 CLC or AKI
ers. Deposits from leaded fuels will ruin the
converters and make it ineffective as an emis- Fuels containing alcohol and ether
sion control device.
Some areas of the U.S. require oxygenated fuels
Cars with catalytic converters have a smaller fuel during certain portions of the year. Oxygenated
tank opening, and gas station pumps have smaller fuels are fuels which contain alcohols (such as
nozzles. This will prevent accidental pumping of methanol or ethanol) or ether (such as MTBE).
leaded fuel into cars with catalytic converters.
Under normal conditions, the amount of these
Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the compounds in the fuel will not affect driveability.
continental U.S. and Canada. Therefore, we
recommend you do not take your car to areas You may use oxygenated fuels in your Porsche,
or countries where unleaded fuel may not be provided the octane requirements for your vehicle
available. are met. We recommend, however, to change
to a different fuel or station if any of the following
problems occur with your vehicle:

246 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emission Control System To assure efcient operation of the Parking
Emission Control System:
In the interest of clean air Warning!
Have your vehicle maintained properly and
Pollution of our environment has become a in accordance with the recommendations Danger of re resulting in serious personal
problem that is of increasing concern to all of described in your Maintenance Booklet. Lack injury or death.
us. We urge you to join us in our efforts for cleaner of proper maintenance, as well as improper
air in controlling the pollutants emitted from the use of the vehicle, will impair the function of Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
automobile. the emission control system and could lead to where the hot exhaust system may come in
damage. contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
Porsche has developed an emission control
other flammable material.
system that controls or reduces those parts of the Do not alter or remove any component of the
emission that can be harmful to our environment. emission control system. If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
Your Porsche is equipped with such a system. the fire department. Do not endanger your life
Do not alter or remove any device, such as by attempting to put out the fire.
Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves,
your new car under the terms and conditions set etc., which are designed to protect your
forth in the Warranty Booklet. vehicle’s emission control system. In addition
You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the respon- to serious engine damage, this can result in Undercoating
sibility to provide regular maintenance service for a fire if excess raw fuel reaches the exhaust
the vehicle and to keep a record of all maintenance system.
Danger!
work performed. To facilitate record keeping, have Do not continue to operate your vehicle if
the service performed by authorized Porsche deal- Danger of re resulting in serious personal
you detect engine misfire or other unusual
ers. They have Porsche trained technicians and injury or death.
operating conditions.
special tools to provide fast and efficient service. Do not apply additional undercoating or
rust-proofing on or near the exhaust manifold,
exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
shields. During driving the substance used for
undercoating could overheat and ignite.

Maintenance, Car Care 247

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How Emission Control Works Crankcase ventilation Catalytic converters
Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable
When an automobile engine is running, it uses The catalytic converters are efficient “clean-up”
emissions from the engine crankcase are not
energy generated through the combustion of a devices built into the exhaust system of the vehicle.
permitted to reach the outside atmosphere. These
mixture of air and fuel. Depending on whether a car The catalytic converters burn the undesirable
emissions are recirculated from the crankcase to
is driven fast or slowly or whether the engine is cold pollutants in the exhaust gas before it is released
the air intake system. From here the emissions
or hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) may not be into the atmosphere.
mix with the intake air and are later burned in the
burned completely, but may be discharged into the
engine. The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is critically
engine crankcase or exhaust system. Additional
important for the life of the catalytic convert-
hydrocarbons may enter the atmosphere through
ers. Therefore, only unleaded fuel must be
evaporation of fuel from the fuel tank. These
used.
hydrocarbons (HC), when released into the air,
contribute to undesirable pollution.
The catalytic converters will be damaged by:
In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of
– push or tow starting the vehicle
nitrogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions.
They, too, are formed during the combustion – misfiring of the engine
process and discharged into the exhaust system. – turning off the ignition while the vehicle is
To reduce these pollutants, your Porsche is moving or
equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection – driving until the fuel tank is completely empty
system to assure a finely balanced air/fuel mixture
under all operating conditions. – by other unusual operating conditions.
Do not continue to operate your vehicle under
Oxygen sensor these conditions, since raw fuel might reach
the catalytic converters. This could result in
The oxygen sensor, installed in the exhaust
pipe continuously senses the oxygen content overheating of the converters. Federal law
prohibits use of leaded fuel in this car.
of the exhaust and signals the information to an
electronic control unit. The control unit corrects
the air/fuel ratio, so the engine always receives an
accurately metered air/fuel mixture.

248 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuel Evaporation Control
Fuel tank venting
The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister
prevent fuel from escaping to the atmosphere at
extreme high outside temperatures, when driving
abruptly around curves and when the car is parked
at an incline or in any other nonlevel position.

Vapor control system and storage

When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected
in the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading
the vapors to the carbon canister where they are
stored as long as the engine does not run.

Purge system
When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from
the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the
ambient air of the canister. This mixture will be
directed to the intake air housing by the tank vent
line, mixed with the intake air and burned during
normal combustion.

Maintenance, Car Care 249

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 the season, mix the water with the appropriate Do not use engine coolant anti-freeze or any
additives. Follow the instructions for the mixture other solution that can damage the car’s paint,
ratio. in the washer reservoir.
Only use window cleaner concentrate which meets
the following requirements:
Warning light
– Dilutability 1:100 If less than 0.52 quarts (0.5 liter) remains, a
– Phosphate-free warning message appears on the on-board
computer.
– Suitable for plastic headlight lenses.
Add washer fluid.
We recommend window cleaner concentrates
approved by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche
dealer will be pleased to advise you.

Summer lling
Water + window cleaner concentrate at the mixing
ratio indicated on the container.
Washer Fluid Winter lling
Capacity Water + antifreeze protection + window cleaner
concentrate at the mixing ratio indicated on the
– Without headlight cleaning system: approxi-
container.
mately 2.6 quarts (2.5 liters).
Please note all the information on the contain-
– With headlight cleaning system: approximately
ers of the window cleaner concentrate or the
6.3 quarts (6.0 liters).
antifreeze protection.

Washer uid Topping off washer uid

The reservoir, with a blue screw cap, is in the
1. Please note all the information on the refill
luggage compartment, to the rear left.
container of the cleaning agent.
Clean water is generally not enough to clean
2. Open cap of the washer-fluid reservoir (arrow).
the windshield and headlights. Depending on
3. Top up washer fluid and close cap properly.

250 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Close cap carefully. Close engine compart-
Warning! ment lid.
Risk of accident resulting in serious personal Noticeable loss of fluid indicates leakage in
injury or death. When the engine is stopped the system. The cause should be remedied
(e.g. when being towed) or the hydraulic immediately at an authorized Porsche dealer.
system fails, there is no assistance for
steering. Therefore, substantially more force
will have to be exerted in order to steer.
Exercise great care when being towed.
Have the fault remedied at your nearest
authorized Porsche dealer.

Checking hydraulic uid

Please observe the chapter ”EXERCISE
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON
Power Steering YOUR VEHICLE” on page 232.

General information Only use hydraulic fluid authorized by Porsche.

Power steering is assisted by hydraulic auxiliary Please observe the chapter ”CAPACITIES” on
forces. The hydraulic fluid reservoir is located in page 335.
the engine compartment. Check the fluid level with the engine stopped and
Note cold (approximately 68°F /20°C ).

The flow noise heard at full steering lock is design- 1. Open the engine compartment lid.
related and does not indicate a defect in the 2. Open the reservoir cap.
steering system.
3. Wipe measuring rod. Close cap and reopen.
The fluid level should lie in the area below
the “Cold” marking. Add hydraulic fluid if
necessary.

Maintenance, Car Care 251

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Filter
Air lter
A dirty air filter not only reduces engine perform-
ance, but can lead to premature engine wear.
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine
maintenance service.
In dusty conditions, check the filter element
more frequently and replace if necessary.

Combination lter
The fresh air passing through the combination filter
into the passenger compartment is virtually free of
dust, pollen, and unpleasant odors.
If the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes,
press the recirculating-air button.
A dirty filter can be the cause of reduced air flow:
Have filter replaced by your authorized
Porsche dealer.
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine
maintenance service.

252 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Transmission Oil
The transmission oil has to be checked and
changed at the intervals listed in your Maintenance
Schedule.
Please observe the chapter ”CAPACITIES” on
page 335.
We recommend that you have the transmission
oil changed at your Porsche dealer, who has
the required lubricants and the necessary filling
equipment.
If you suspect an oil leak in the transmission,
have your authorized Porsche dealer check it out
immediately.

Maintenance, Car Care 253

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Transmission Fluid
The torque converter and the transmission are
lubricated with Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF).
The final drive requires transmission oil.
Please observe the chapter ”CAPACITIES” on
page 335.
Do not tow the car or run the engine without ATF
in the transmission. The automatic transmission
may be damaged by even a tiny speck of dirt, only
a clean funnel or spout must be used when adding
ATF.
The ATF and transmission oil has to be checked
and changed at the intervals listed in your Mainte-
nance Schedule.
We recommend that you have the ATF and trans-
mission oil changed at your Porsche dealer, who
has the required lubricants and the necessary filling
equipment.
If you suspect an oil leak in the transmission,
have your authorized Porsche dealer check it out
immediately.

254 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Wiper Blades If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash,
wax residues may adhere to the windshield. These
General information wax residues can be removed by using window
cleaner concentrate.
When wiper performance deteriorates,
replace the wipers. Please observe the chapter ”WASHER FLUID”
on page 250.
Please observe the chapter ”CAR CARE
INSTRUCTIONS” on page 257. Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
Caution! The wiper blades may be damaged.
Risk of damage if the wiper arm accidentally Replace damaged wiper blades as soon as
falls back on to the window. possible.

Always hold the wiper arm securely when

Changing windshield wiper blades
replacing the wiper blade.

Caution!
Risk of damage. If a wiper blade is not A - Passenger’s side, curved wiper blade
Caution!
changed properly, it can come loose when B - Driver’s side, wiper blade with spoiler
Risk of damage if wiper blades that are frozen the car is moving.
in place are loosened improperly.
1. Apply the handbrake.
Check whether the wiper blade is seated
Thaw the wiper blades before loosening them. securely. The wiper blade must engage the 2. Switch the wipers off (position 0) and remove
wiper arm properly. the ignition key.
Maintenance note 3. Fold windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
Periodically clean the wiper blades with
Porsche window cleaner, especially after the 4. Press together the plastic spring of the wiper
vehicle has been washed in a car wash. If they blade (right arrow). Pull wiper blade out of
are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains), they wiper arm.
can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
5. Insert new wiper blade until you feel it engage.
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a Ensure that the new wiper blade is inserted
result of the following: into the wiper arm in the same position:

Maintenance, Car Care 255

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 – direction of the spoiler on the driver side, Fold wiper arm away from the glass.
– curvature on the passenger side. 1. Press together the plastic spring of the wiper
blade.
6. Carefully fold wiper arm back onto the wind-
shield. 2. Pull wiper blade upwards and out of wiper arm.
3. Insert new wiper blade into the wiper arm from
above.
4. Press together the plastic spring of the wiper
blade and engage it in the wiper arm until it
snaps into place.
5. Carefully fold wiper arm back onto the window.

Changing rear window wiper blade

Caution!
Risk of damage. If a wiper blade is not
changed properly, it can come loose when
the car is moving.
Check whether the wiper blade is seated
securely. The wiper blade must engage the
wiper arm properly.

Apply the handbrake.

Switch the rear wiper off (position 0) and
remove the ignition key.

256 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Car Care Instructions Washing
Warning!
Long-term maintenance of value Risk of serious personal injury or damage to Washing and preservation
Please observe the chapter ”EXERCISE the vehicle or property. Cleaning agents may The best method of protecting your car from the
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON be hazardous to your health. Most chemical damaging effects of the environment is frequent
YOUR VEHICLE” on page 232. cleaners are concentrates which require washing and the application of a preservative. The
dilution. High concentrations might cause underside of your vehicle should also be thoroughly
Regular and correct care helps to maintain problems ranging from irritation to serious washed for cinders, salt or sanding at winter’s end.
the value of your car and is also a precondi- injury as well as damage to your vehicle.
tion for the New Vehicle Warranty and the Anti The longer salt, road dust and industrial dust,
Corrosion Warranty. Keep cleaning agents out of reach from dead insects, bird droppings or substances from
children. trees (resin, pollen) are allowed to remain on the
Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially
bodywork, the more serious is their harmful effect.
developed car-care products from the Observe all caution labels.
Porsche program available either singly or as New cars should be washed carefully with plenty
Always read directions on the container
complete car-care sets. They will be pleased of clear water to protect the new paint work. Dark
before using any product. These directions
to help you select suitable products. paint finishes show up the smallest of surface
may contain information necessary to avoid
damage (e.g., scratches) more readily than lighter
Whether you use Porsche products or other personal injury.
colors.
commercially available cleaning agents rst Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish
make sure of their correct application. Dark colors are also more susceptible to scratch-
remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They
ing because of the composition of their pigments
A Porsche that is well-cared for can look like new may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other
and require particularly careful paint care.
for years. It all depends on the amount of care the ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well
owner is willing to give the car. vented area. Do not wash your car in bright sunlight or while
the bodywork is still hot.
Do not clean the underside of chassis,
fenders, wheel covers, etc., without protecting When washing by hand, use abundant water, a
your hands and arms as you may cut yourself soft sponge or wash brush, and Porsche car
on sharp-edged metal parts. shampoo.
Begin by spraying the body thoroughly with
Moisture and road salt on brakes may affect water to rinse away loose dirt.
braking efficiency.
Test the brakes after each vehicle washing.

Maintenance, Car Care 257

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 After washing, rinse the car with plenty of The following parts are particularly susceptible Convertible top
water and then dry with a chamois leather. Do to damage:
not use the same chamois leather for drying Care and treatment
– Convertible top (hot wax treatment cannot be
as you use for cleaning the windshield and
used, as the wax attacks the convertible top Never remove snow and ice using a sharp
windows.
material) edged object.

Warning! – Windshield wipers (always switch them off Incorrect care and treatment can damage the
to prevent them wiping unintentionally in convertible top and cause leaks. Any repair work
Moisture which gets on to the brakes during intermittent or sensor operation) can be done by your authorized Porsche dealer.
a car wash can reduce braking efciency or
– External antennas (always unscrew) Note
make the brakes pull unevenly which could
increase the danger of an accident, causing – Roof Transport System (always remove No folding top is 100% leak proof.
serious personal injuries or death. completely) Due to the constant changing of loads and strains
Always apply the brakes a few times after – Rear spoiler to which a car is subject to when driving on roads,
washing the car to test braking efficiency and minor wind noise and seepage at joints between
– Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the tire
dry the brake discs. When doing this, take the top, body and doors on convertible tops
height, the greater the risk of damage)
care not to hamper other road users behind cannot be completely sealed in certain areas.
you (traffic conditions permitting). – High-gloss wheels (to prevent these from Therefore small leaks are considered normal
getting scratched, do not clean with the for these models. In addition, your convertible
wheel-cleaning brushes of the car wash). top should not be washed in a car wash. The
top may experience damage by the brushes or
Automatic car washes Please consult the operator before using
may experience leaks due to the high pressure
automatic car washes.
Please observe the chapter ”WIPER BLADES” water streams directed in areas which would not
on page 255. Wash and dry by hand all points not reached encounter water in normal driving conditions.
by a car wash, such as door and lid seams or
Optional add-on parts or parts which project door sills.
beyond the contours of the vehicle may be
damaged by design features (e.g. brushes) of Note
automatic car washes. Automatic car washes spray water at odd angles
and high pressures, which are not seen in normal
driving. Therefore, water can sometimes find its
way into the passengers compartment during or
shortly after the car wash.

258 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cleaning If there is leakage in the convertible-top cover Paint
or at its seams or folds, the special Porsche
Caution! convertible-top care product can be used. General information
Please note the information on the container. Never rub a dusty car with a dry cloth since
Risk of damage due to the cleaning jet of the
dust particles are abrasive and could dull and
high-pressure cleaning equipment or hot wax Remove bird droppings immediately since the
damage the surface finish.
treatment. acid in them will make the rubber swell and the
convertible top will become leaky. The paintwork of your car is exposed to all types of
Do not clean the convertible top with high-
mechanical and chemical conditions, particularly
pressure cleaning equipment. Open convertible top only when it is completely
climatic ones such as bright sunlight, rain, frost
dry, otherwise damp stains and scrub marks
Do not use the hot wax treatment. and snow. Ultraviolet light, rapid changes in
may occur which cannot be removed.
temperature, rain, snow, industrial dust and
Try to remove spots from the convertible-top chemical deposits constantly attack the paint
Do not wash the convertible top each time the car cover by rubbing carefully with a soft rubber which is only able to withstand such exposure in the
is washed. It is usually sufficient to spray or wash it sponge. long term if it is given regular care and attention.
with clean water.
Do not apply silicone polishes to the wind-
Brush dust off the convertible top in the Door lock shield, windows or convertible top.
direction of the weave using a soft brush.
To prevent the door lock from freezing during
Do not treat matt-painted components with
Only if there is heavy dirt, wet the convertible the cold season, the lock cylinder should be
preservatives or polishes as this will spoil the
top with lukewarm water and the Porsche covered during a wash.
matte effect.
Wash-Shampoo & convertible-top cleaner,
Should the lock freeze, use an ordinary de-icer.
using a sponge or soft brush, and rub gently.
In many cases, a well warmed key can help. Preservation
Rinse Wash-Shampoo & convertible-top
Never use excessive force.
cleaner thoroughly off the convertible top The paint surface becomes dull over time due to
with clean water. weathering. It is therefore necessary to preserve
the paint regularly. This keeps the paint shiny and
After washing it, treat the convertible-top
elastic. Dirt is prevented from adhering to the
cover at least once a year with the special
paint surface and industrial dust is prevented from
Porsche convertible-top care product. Do not
penetrating the paint.
allow the convertible-top care product to come
into contact with paint or windows. If it does, Provided it is washed and treated with preservative
remove immediately. regularly, the brand new finish of your car will be
retained for years to come.

Maintenance, Car Care 259

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Apply paint preservative after the car wash and Engine compartment and oil residue. The interior trim and upholstery
polish it dry to obtain a bright finish. release particles, particularly in strong sunlight,
The engine compartment and the surface of the
which collect on the insides of the windows. These
engine are treated with a corrosion-inhibitor at the
Polishing factory.
deposits are augmented by impurities in the air
which enters the car through the fresh air vents.
Do not resort to using Porsche polish until it
If degreasing solvents are used to clean the
becomes evident that the normal preservatives Clean all windows regularly, inside and outside,
engine compartment or the engine is washed
no longer produce the desired finish. with Porsche window cleaner.
down, the process almost invariably removes the
corrosion-inhibiting coating. It is then absolutely If you use a chamois leather for the windows,
Spots and stains
necessary to have a durable preservative applied do not use it for paintwork as it will otherwise
Remove tar stains, grease, oil spots and to all surfaces, body seams, joints and assemblies pick up a certain amount of preservative or
dead insects as soon as possible with Insect in the engine compartment. This also applies when polish and could smear the windows and thus
Remover. They can cause discoloration if corrosion-inhibitor parts are replaced. impair vision.
allowed to remain on the paintwork.
Remove dead insects with Porsche insect
Wash the affected area immediately after Caution! remover.
treating it.
Risk of damage to the alternator. Note
Minor paint damage Do not point the cleaning jet directly at the Door windows feature a water-repellent (hydropho-
alternator, or cover the alternator. bic) coating which prevents soiling of the windows.
Have minor paint damage, such as scratches,
This coating is subject to natural wear and can be
scores or chips caused by flying stones,
renewed.
repaired immediately by your authorized Effective corrosion-proofing is particularly impor-
Porsche dealer before corrosion sets in. tant during the cold weather season. If your car Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
However, if there are already traces of corrosion, is driven frequently in areas where salt has been
they must first be removed carefully and thorough- spread on the roads, the whole engine compart- Wiper blades
ly. Coat the area with a rust-proofing primer and ment should be cleaned thoroughly after the winter Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
finish off with a top coat. The paint code and color to prevent salt from causing any lasting damage. A for a clear view.
number are found on the data bank in the Mainte- full under-body wash should also be performed at
the same time. Replace the wiper blades twice per year
nance booklet and on the filler flap.
(before and after the cold season) or whenever
wiper performance deteriorates.
Windows
The road dust which settles on the windshield
and windows contains particles of tire rubber

260 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Periodically clean the wiper blades with Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes
Porsche window cleaner, especially after the Warning!
Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes can discolor due
vehicle has been washed in a car wash. If they Danger of re resulting in serious personal to soiling, strong heat, and combustion residues.
are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains), they injury or death.
can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth. The original polish can be achieved again using
Do not apply additional undercoating or commercially available metal polishing paste or
Undercoating rust-proofing on or near the exhaust manifold, metal polish.
exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage shields. During driving the substance used for Light alloy wheels
to this protective coating in day to day driving, undercoating could overheat and ignite.
it is advisable to have the underside of the car Please observe the chapter ”AUTOMATIC CAR
inspected at certain intervals - preferably before WASHES” on page 258.
the start of winter and again in spring - and the Before applying fresh underseal, carefully
undercoating restored as necessary. remove any deposits or dirt and grease. Once Warning!
it has dried, the new undercoating compound
Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with Danger of accident resulting in serious
forms a tough protective coating which
the bodyseal treatment procedures and has personal injury or death if cleaning agents
provides efficient rust-proofing of the floor
the necessary equipment for applying factory (e.g. wheel cleaning agents) come into
panels and components.
approved materials. We recommend that you contact with the brake discs. The resulting
entrust them with such work and inspections. Always apply a fresh coating of suitable lm on the brake discs can impair braking
preservative to unprotected areas after performance.
Unlike conventional spray oils, undercoating and
cleaning the underside of the body, the
rust-proofing compounds based on bitumen or wax
transmission, the engine or carrying out Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into
do not attack the sound-proofing materials applied
repairs to under-body, engine or transmission contact with the brake discs.
at the factory.
components. If cleaning agent has come into contact with
Effective rust-proofing is particularly important dur- the brake discs, thoroughly clean the brake
ing the cold weather season. If your car is driven discs with a strong jet of water.
frequently in areas where salt has been spread Paying attention to any road users behind you,
on the roads, the whole engine compartment dry the brake discs by applying the brakes at
should be cleaned thoroughly after the winter to short intervals.
prevent salt from causing any lasting damage. A
full under-body wash should also be performed at
the same time. Pitting may occur if metallic particles which cause
contact corrosion (e.g. brass or copper in brake

Maintenance, Car Care 261

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dust) are allowed to remain on the aluminum for too In order to prevent damage to the anti-friction Leather
long. coating, the inner door seals, the convertible
If possible, wash the wheels with a sponge or
top seals and hardtop seals must not be Characteristics and special features
treated with care products.
wash brush about every two weeks. In areas The natural surface markings of leather, e.g.
where salt is spread on winter roads or there creases, healed scars, insect sting marks,
is a lot of airborne industrial dust, it is best to Headlights, lights, interior and exterior structural differences and slight variations in shade
clean the wheels weekly. The Porsche Light plastic parts, adhesive lms and grain add to the attractiveness of the natural
Alloy Wheel Cleaner (ph-value 9.5) can be Use only clean water and a little dishwashing leather product.
used for this purpose. If the ph-value of detergent to clean light lenses, plastic A special mention must be made here of natural
the detergent is incorrect, the protective headlight lenses, plastic parts and surfaces. leather. For natural leather, carefully selected
coating on the wheels will be destroyed. Do not clean when dry. Use a soft sponge or hides of the highest quality are used. It is not cov-
Polishes which dissolve oxides, such as those a soft, lint-free cloth. Gently wipe the surface ered completely with dye on production. “Nature’s
frequently used for other metals, or abrasive without applying too much pressure. The signature” is therefore easily recognizable. This
tools or agents are unsuitable because they Porsche inside window cleaner is also suitable fine material is distinguished by an outstanding
break down the oxide lm of the protective for cleaning plastic surfaces. Follow the seating comfort, special suppleness and a typical
coating and will cause discoloration of the cleaning instructions on the container. Never patina.
wheel. use other chemical cleaners or solvents.
Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water. Leather care and treatment
Every three months, after cleaning, coat the
wheels with a car wax or non-corrosive grease Clean all types of leather regularly to remove
(vaseline). Using a clean cloth thoroughly rub fine dust using a soft, damp, white woolen
the grease into the surface. cloth or a commercially available microfiber
cloth.
Door, roof, lid and window seals Remove heavy contamination with Porsche
Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salts) from leather cleaner. Please always follow the
all seals regularly using warm soapy water. instructions for use given on the containers.
Do not use any chemical cleaning agents or Caustic cleaners and hard cleaning objects
solvents. must not be used.
When there is a frost hazard, the outer door seals Perforated leather must under no circum-
and the front and rear lid seals can be protected stances get wet on its reverse side.
against freezing into place by a suitable care
product.

262 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Once cleaned, leather (particularly the heavily Alcantara Storing your Porsche
stressed leather seats) must be treated only with
Porsche leather care liquid. Regular care If you intend to store your Porsche for a prolonged
period, please consult your authorized Porsche
Do not use a leather care product to clean
Fabric, upholstery, carpets and oor-mats dealer. The staff will be glad to advise you on the
Alcantara.
most suitable and necessary methods.
Use only a vacuum cleaner or a medium stiff For regular care it is sufficient to clean the cover
brush. Clean your vehicle thoroughly inside and
with a soft brush.
outside. Clean the engine compartment.
Remove stains and spots with Porsche stain Heavy abrasion or rubbing when cleaning causes a The under carriage and chassis components
remover. permanent change in the surface. should be free of dirt and salt deposits.
The Porsche range of accessories includes Fill up the fuel tank.
nonskid floor-mats to protect the carpets in Cleaning when lightly soiled
summer and winter. Change the oil and oil filter, and run the engine
Wet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap
for several minutes.
solution and wipe off the dirt.
Warning! Increase the tire pressure to 58 psi (4 bar). It
Cleaning when heavily soiled is not recommended to lift the vehicle, due to
Risk of accident resulting in serious personal
the possibility of corrosion on shock absorber
injury or death. Wet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or
piston shafts. The vehicle should be moved
thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
Always check the movement of the pedals slightly, approximately every four weeks, to
outside in.
before driving and make sure that they are not prevent flat spot on the tires.
obstructed by a floor-mat or any other object.
Safety belts Climate control
Secure the floor-mat to prevent it from sliding
If it becomes necessary to clean the belts, you can The air conditioning system should be in good
into positions that could interfere with the safe
use any mild washing agent. Allow the belts to dry working condition and fully charged.
operation of your vehicle - do not install them
prior to retracting, but avoid direct sunlight.
loosely in the vehicle. Your Porsche dealer will
be glad to offer you nonskid floor-mats of the Only use suitable cleaners. If unsuitable Windshield/Headlight washer
correct size. cleaners are used or any attempt is made Check and correct antifreeze/cleaning
to dye or bleach the belts, the webbing may be solution level as necessary.
weakened and thus constitute a safety risk.

Maintenance, Car Care 263

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical system
Remove the battery from the vehicle and store
it in a cool dry place, not on a cement floor.
When the battery is disconnected, the
alarm system is deactivated.
Recharge the battery every 3 months. If the
battery remains in the vehicle with the cables
connected, it is necessary to check, remove
and recharge the battery every 2-3 weeks. Do
not fast charge the battery.
Please observe the chapter ”BATTERY” on
page 295.

Vehicle interior
The interior must be dry, especially in the area
of the floor carpets. The use of drying agents
(Silica-Gel) is recommended in vehicles with
leather interior and in areas with high humidity. The
recommended amount is 3 fabric bags of 1.1 lbs.
(500 grams) each placed on the floor carpets.
Windows, doors and lids must be closed. The air
vents should be opened.

264 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working on your
Vehicle ....................................................... 266
Tires/Wheels .............................................. 267
Loading Information ..................................... 278
Flat Tire ...................................................... 281
Lifting the vehicle ........................................ 283
Wheel Bolts ................................................ 285
Spacers ..................................................... 286
Changing a wheel ........................................ 287
Electrical System ........................................ 292
Battery ....................................................... 295
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables ........ 300
Lights, Replacing Bulbs ................................ 302
Headlights .................................................. 304
Tail Light ..................................................... 312
Additional brake lights .................................. 313
License Plate Light ...................................... 314
Luggage Compartment-/Engine Compartment-
/Footwell Light ............................................ 315
Door Guard-/Curb Light ................................ 316
Interior Light, Reading Lights ........................ 317
Adjusting Headlights .................................... 318
Towing ....................................................... 321

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 265

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Exercise Extreme Caution when In particular, be very careful to ensure that Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), problems in the operation of the car. If in
Working on your Vehicle jewelry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot doubt about any servicing, have it done by
get caught in the engine-compartment your authorized Porsche dealer. Improper
Danger! blower, fan, belts or other moving parts. The maintenance during the warranty period may
radiator and radiator fans are in the front of affect your Porsche warranty coverage.
Ignoring the following instructions may cause the car. The engine-compartment blower
serious personal injury or death. Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid
is mounted on the engine-compartment lid.
or coolant, are hazardous to your health. Keep
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle The engine-compartment blower can start or
these fluids out of children’s reach and dispose
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not continue running as a function of temperature,
of them in accordance with the appropriate
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do even with the engine switched off. Carry out
regulations.
not attempt the adjustments described on the work in these areas only with the engine off,
the ignition switched off, and exercise extreme Some countries require additional tools and
following pages. This caution also applies to
caution. special spare parts to be carried in your
the entire vehicle.
vehicle. Please make enquiries before driving
Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic
abroad.
ventilated area. ignition system. When the ignition is on,
high voltage is present in all wires connected
Ensure that there are no open flames in with the ignition system; therefore, exercise
the area of your vehicle at any time when extreme caution when working on any part of
fuel fumes might be present. Be especially the engine while the ignition is on or the engine
cautious of such devices such as hot water is running.
heaters which ignite a flame intermittently.
Always support your car with safety stands if it
Before working on any part in the engine com- is necessary to work under the car.
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment When working under the car without safety
components can burn skin on contact. stands but with the wheels on the ground,
make sure the car is on level ground, the
Be alert and cautious around engine at all wheels are blocked, and that the engine
times while the engine is running. If work has cannot be started. Remove the ignition key.
to be performed with the engine running,
always set the parking brake, and make Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
sure the shift lever is in neutral position or the battery or fuel. Keep a fire extinguisher
the selector lever in position P or N. close at hand.

266 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tires/Wheels
Danger!
General information Risk of loss of control and serious personal
The original equipment tires and wheel rims on injury or death.
your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal If while driving, your vehicle experiences a
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. sudden vibration or ride disturbance, and/or
you suspect that possible damage to your
For your safety remember the following: tires or vehicle has occurred, you should
– Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit immediately reduce your speed without
your Porsche. excessive use of the brakes.

– If you intend to use other than original equip- Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and
ment wheels, be sure that they conform to inspect the tires. If you cannot determine the
Porsche specifications for your model. Only cause for the disturbance, have your vehicle
tires with the same make and with the same towed to the nearest Porsche or tire dealer to
specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...) can be have your vehicle or tire(s) inspected.
mounted. Continuing to operate the vehicle without Example
– The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that correction could result in a loss of control and
do not meet specifications of the original serious personal injury.
factory installed equipment will affect the safe
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
operation of your vehicle. Quality grades can be found where applicable
– Before you plan on exchanging wheels, or on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
snow tires already mounted on the wheel rims, maximum section width.
consult your authorized Porsche dealer. Your All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
dealer has the technical information necessary Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
to advise you which wheel rims and wheel
bolts are compatible with the original factory Treadwear
installations.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specific government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 267

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and Tire pressures
government course as a tire graded 100. The excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
relative performance of tires depends upon the failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
actual conditions of their use, however, and may performance which all passenger car tires must Warning!
depart significantly from the norm due to variations meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Incorrect tire pressure causes increased tire
in driving habits, service practices and differences Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent wear and adversely affects road handling.
in road characteristics and climate. higher levels of performance on the laboratory test This could lead to tire failure, resulting in loss
wheel than the minimum required by law. of control, leading to serious personal injury
Traction AA, A, B, C or death.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are Warning!
Always use an accurate tire pressure gauge
AA, A, B, and C and they represent the tire’s ability
when checking inflation pressures.
to stop on wet pavement as measured under The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
controlled conditions on specified government test lished for a tire that is properly inflated and Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- listed on the tire sidewall.
may have poor traction performance. tion, or excessive loading, either separately Please observe the chapter ”TIRE PRESSURE
or in combination, can cause heat buildup and PLATE” on page 327.
Warning! possible tire failure, resulting loss of control,
leading to serious personal injury or death. Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires
must be cold, ambient temperature maximum
The traction grade assigned to this is based (68°F /20°C ), when adjusting the inflation
on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and pressure. Avoid sunlight striking the tires
does not include cornering (turned) traction, before measuring cold pressures, since
acceleration, hydroplaning or peak traction the pressures would rise from temperature
characteristics. influence.
Valve caps protect the valve from dust and
dirt, and thus from leakage. Always screw
Temperature A, B, C caps tightly down. Replace missing caps
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B immediately.
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the Use only plastic valve caps.
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperatures can cause the material of

268 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do not use commercially available sealant trigger illumination of the TPC low tire pressure Never exceed the specified axle load. Over-
or tire inflating bottles. Only use Porsche message. loading can shorten the service life of the tires
approved tire sealant. and car, as well as lead to dangerous vehicle
On vehicles with tire pressure monitoring:
reactions and long braking distances. Damage
Please observe the chapter ”TPC TIRE due to overloading is not covered by the vehi-
Please observe the chapter ”TIRE PRESSURES PRESSURE MONITORING” on page 127. cle warranty.
FOR COLD TIRES” on page 334.
When tires are warm, the tire pressure is
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), increased. Please observe the chapter ”LOADING
should be checked every 2 weeks when cold
Never let air out of hot tires. This could cause INFORMATION” on page 278.
(68°F /20°C ) and inflated to the inflation pres-
sure recommended in this Owner’s Manual or on the tire pressure to fall below the prescribed Please observe the chapter ”TIRE PRESSURES
the tire-pressure plate. If your vehicle has tires of a value. FOR COLD TIRES” on page 334.
different size than the size indicated in this Owner’s Insufficient tire filling pressure can cause tires to
Manual or on the tire-pressure plate, you should overheat and thus be damaged - even invisibly. Hid-
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for den tire damage is not eliminated by subsequently
those tires. correcting the tire pressure.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPC) that
Overloading
illuminates a low tire pressure message when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Danger!
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure message
Risk of damage to vehicle parts, loss of
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
control and serious personal injury or death.
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire the roof load.
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
If loading the vehicle also correct the tire
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle
handling and stopping ability.
can be found on the tire pressure plate and in
Please note that the TPC is not a substitute for the chapter technical data.
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 269

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire pressure plate F Recommended tire pressure for the
rear axle These values are for cold tires
Information on the tire pressure plate (68°F /20°C ).

A Seating capacity G In vehicles with collapsible spare wheel:

Maximum number of vehicle occupants, Size and tire pressure of the spare
including the driver. wheel.

B Vehicle load limit

Is the maximum total weight limit Tire traction
specified of the load (passengers
and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the Warning!
maximum weight of passengers and When driving on wet or slushy roads, a wedge
cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. of water may build up between the tires
Please observe the chapter and the road. This phenomenon is known
”LOADING INFORMATION” on page as “hydroplane” and may cause partial or
278. complete loss of traction, vehicle control or
Example of a tire pressure plate C Tire size for the front axle stopping ability.
Check with your authorized Porsche Reduce speed on wet surface to prevent this.
dealer about the current release status.

D Recommended tire pressure for the

front axle These values are for cold tires
Tire life
(68°F /20°C ).
Tire life depends on various factors, i. e., road
E Tire size for the rear axle surfaces, traffic and weather conditions, driving
Check with your authorized Porsche habits, type of tires and tire care.
dealer about the current release status.
Inspect your tires for wear and damage before
driving off. If you notice uneven or substantial
wear, wheels might need alignment or tires
should be balanced or replaced.

270 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire wear Specialized high performance tires on high Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
performance sports cars exhibit more wear the wheels.
The original equipment tires on your Porsche have
than those on a family sedan, or even a high
built-in tire wear indicators. They are molded into Check wheel rims for corrosion.
performance sedan. Therefore, it is important
the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as
to check your tire pressure and condition at Remove road salt, if driving in winter.
approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) bands when the tire
least every two weeks.
tread depth is down to 1/16 of an in. (1.6 mm).
Tire damage, puncture
When the indicators appear in two or more
If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly, Check tires for imbedded material, cuts,
adjacent grooves, it is time to replace the tires.
consult your Porsche dealer. Uneven wear may punctures, cracks and bulges (side wall)
We recommend, however, that you do not let the
not always be due to improper wheel alignment. It before driving off.
tires wear down to this extent. Worn tires cannot
grip the road surface properly and are even less can be the result of individual driving habits such as In case of tire damage, where it is uncertain
effective on wet roads. cornering at high speeds. If the tire pressure is not whether there is a break in the ply with all its
checked and adjusted regularly, abnormal tire wear consequences or tire damage caused by thermal
In the United States, state laws may govern the can also occur. or mechanical overloading due to loss of pressure
minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such
or any other prior damage, we recommend that the
laws.
Tire care tire be replaced for safety reasons.

Danger! Avoid damaging tires and wheel rims. If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that
If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle, the difference in tread depth on one axle must not
Driving on worn tires can result in loss of exceed 30%. Handling inconsistencies may result.
control of the vehicle and could cause serious drive slowly and at an obtuse angle.
personal injuries or death. Check tires for uneven wear and damage Perform a visual inspection if necessary.
before driving off.
Do not drive with worn tires or tires showing
Danger!
cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden Remove imbedded material.
deflation and loss of control which could cause Risk of serious personal injury or death.
Replace worn or damaged tires immediately.
severe personal injury. Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure
Keep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc. away from tires. increases risk of a tire failure and resulting
Replace missing valve stem caps. loss of control. Furthermore, low tire pressure
increases rate of wear of the affected tires.
Keep tires inflated correctly.
Check tires - including sidewalls - regularly for
Wash tires when washing the vehicle. Also
foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges.
clean inner side of wheels.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 271

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 After driving off road, examine tires for signs Tire replacements Please adjust your driving style accordingly.
of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or
Installation of new tires should only be done by a
foreign objects stuck in the tread. Replace a If in doubt, contact your Porsche dealer. Use only
qualified tire technician.
damaged tire if necessary. tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles If you do not use a Porsche recommended Valves
if possible. Avoid driving over steep or sharp replacement tire, make sure that you pur-
Rubber valve stems must be replaced every time
curbs. chase your new tires from a reputable tire
a tire is replaced. For metal valves, the installation
dealer and that the dealer complies with all
In cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly and replacement instructions must be observed.
manufacturers warnings for those tires.
the inner side) checked by an authorized
Use only genuine Porsche metal valves.
Porsche dealer. Only tires with the same make and with the
same specication code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...) Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
can be mounted. valve caps. Soiled valve inserts can cause a
gradual loss of air.
Before mounting new tires, check with your
Porsche dealer about the current release Use only plastic valve caps.
status.
Use tires with “ZR” quality standards. There are Parking at the curb
currently no standards concerning tire strength at
speeds above 150 mph (240 km/h). Warning!
Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle Hard impacts against curbs (or trafc islands)
at the time. Only tires of the same make and type are dangerous and may cause hidden tire
must be used. Mixed tires are not permissible. damage which is not noticeable until later.
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction. You Such damage can result in accidents at high
should therefore drive at moderate speeds during speeds causing serious personal injury or
the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km). death. Depending on the force of impact, the
edge of the rim can also be damaged.
If new tires are installed only on one axle, a
noticeable change in handling occurs due to If you are in doubt, have the wheel checked by
the different tread depth of the other tires. This an expert, particularly if you suspect damage
happens especially if only rear tires are replaced. on the inside.
However, this condition disappears as the new
tires are broken in.

272 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle, If no cause for the fault can be found, drive Removing and storing tires
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle. Exercise carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche
care when parking along curbs. dealer. After changing, adjust tire pressure and torque
wheel bolts diagonally to 94 ft.lb. (130 Nm).
Tires must always remain on the same side
of the vehicle. When wheels are removed,
Wheel alignment, wheel balancing the direction of rotation and position of each
As a precaution, have wheels with summer wheel should be marked.
tires balanced in the spring, and those with
mud and snow tires before winter. Unbalanced Example
wheels may affect car handling and tire life. Only
FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
the specified weights may be used for wheel
balancing. Self-adhesive weights must not come Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with
into contact with cleaning agents, since they could their marking.
drop off. Uneven tread wear indicates wheel The perception that tire durability and performance
imbalance. In this event, the vehicle should be are immune to the effects of storage and age
checked at an authorized Porsche dealer. is unfounded. Chemical additives, which make
the rubber elastic, lose their effectiveness in the
Warning! course of time and the rubber becomes brittle and
If, during a trip, uneven running or vibrations cracks.
occur that could be caused by damage to Therefore, the tires should be inspected from
tires or the car, the speed must be reduced time to time.
immediately, but without braking sharply.
Note
If you continue your trip without having the
cause of the fault remedied, you might lose Under no circumstances should tires older than 6
control of your vehicle which could cause years be used on your Porsche.
serious personal injury or death. The age of the tire can be obtained from the
Stop the vehicle and check the tires. “DOT” code number. If, for example, the last four
numbers read 0706, then the tire was produced in
the 7th week of 2006.
Store tires in a cool and dry place.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 273

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Snow tires Maintenance note
Danger!
For a better grip on snow and ice, use radial M+S We recommend fitting winter tires on the
tires with studs. Check with your local Motor Tires with badly worn treads and studs are vehicle at temperatures below 45°F (7°C ).
Vehicle Bureau for possible restrictions. very dangerous and could cause accidents
resulting in serious personal injuries or death. Winter tires lose their traction capability when
their tread depth falls below 5/32 in. (4 mm).
Danger! Make sure they are replaced immediately.
Risk of loss of control and damage to the
vehicle as well as serious personal injury or Do not drive a vehicle equipped with snow
death. The standard tires prole and rubber tires at prolonged high speed. Snow tires
mixture are optimized for wet and dry driving do not have the same degree of traction on
conditions, and may not prove favorable for dry, wet or snowfree roads as a normal tire.
snow conditions. Furthermore, snow tires wear rapidly under
Therefore install M+S tires before driving in these conditions.
such conditions. Comply with all state and local laws governing
snow tire and tread depth requirements.
Before mounting snow tires, consult with
your Porsche dealer. He has the technical Danger!
information necessary to advise you on wheel
Risk of accident and serious personal injury
and tire compatibility. or death due to excessive speed.
Snow tires should have the same load capacity as
Always check the maximum speed rating on
original equipment tires and should be mounted on
the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle.
all four wheels. Snow tires with studs should be run
at moderate speeds when new in order to give the Never exceed the maximum speed rating of
studs time to settle. the tires.

Fit winter tires to both axles well before the

cold season begins. Your authorized Porsche
dealer will be pleased to advise you.

274 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Snow chains
Caution!

Caution! Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the

5 mm spacers are not removed before tting
Risk of damage to body, axle or brake compo- snow chains.
nents.
To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the
Fit snow chains only to the rear wheels, and 5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels.
only with the tire/rim combination listed
in the Technical Data. To ensure adequate
clearance between chain and body, Porsche To fit/remove the spacers: Please consult an
recommends only the use of fine-link chains authorized Porsche dealer.
such as those approved by Porsche. Please observe the chapter ”5 MM SPACERS”
Please observe the chapter ”TECHNICAL on page 288.
DATA” on page 328.
Tire designations
Follow instructions issued by the supplier of
the chains. Due to new speed and load ratings for radial tires,
new designations have come into force for snow
tires for your Porsche.
Different states and countries have varying
statutory requirements regarding maximum The designation to be used for ZR tires is e.g.,
speed. Check with local authorities for possible 265/40 ZR 18 (Z = code letter for radial tires for
restrictions. speeds above 150 mph / 240 km/h).

Remove chains as soon as the roads are free

of ice and snow.

Fitting snow chains

911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
The use of snow chains is not permitted when
5 mm spacers are mounted.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 275

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example of Inscription

Inscription on radial tire – ZR - code letter for radial tires for speeds B TIN (Tire Identication Number)
above 150 mph / 240 km/h There are cur-
Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx
A Tire size rently no standards concerning tire strength at
speeds above 150 mph (240 km/h). – DOT - The DOT symbol indicates that the
Example: P 295/30 ZR 19 100 Y
tires comply with the requirements of the US
– R - Belt type code letter for radial
– P - The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle. Department of Transportation and provides
This information is not included on all tires. – 19 - Indication of rim diameter in inches information about:
– 295 - Indication of tire width in mm – 100 - Load capacity coefficient – first two-digit code means manufacture’s
identification mark.
– 30 - Indication of tire height to tire width ratio in – Y - Speed code letter
percent – second two-digit code means tire size.
– XL (Extra Load) - Tire with increased load
rating – third four-digit code means tire type code.

276 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 – fourth four-digit code means date of manu- Speed code letter
facture. If, for example, the last four numbers
The speed code letter indicates the maximum
read 0204, the tire was produced in the 2nd
permissible speed for the tire. This code letter is
week of 2004.
shown on the tire sidewall.
C Tire ply composition and material T = up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls and H = up to 131 mph (210 km/h)
their material composition. V = up to 150 mph (240 km/h)

D Maximum permissible ination pressure W = up to 167 mph (270 km/h)

The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure Y = up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
to which a tire can be inflated. Tip on driving
Do not exceed the permissible inflation Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower
pressure. than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be
mounted only if they bear an M+S identification on
E Maximum Load rating the tire sidewall.
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can be A - Rim width in inches
Please note that in addition to the winter tires,
carried by the tire. If you replace tires always use a B - Rim-ange contour code letter
all-season and all-terrain tires are also subject
tire that has the same maximum load rating as the C - Symbol for drop-center rim
to speed limits and bear this identification.
factory installed tire. D - Rim diameter in inches
E - Double hump
Inscription on light alloy wheels F - Rim offset in mm
F Radial
Maintenance note
The identification indicates if the tire has radial
structure. Protect the valve inserts against soiling with Note on operation
valve caps. Use only plastic valve caps. Soiled
The rim width in inches A and the rim offset F
G Term of tubeless or tube tire valve inserts can cause a gradual loss of air.
are visible from the outside. This information
Identification for tubeless tires. can be found near the tire valve.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 277

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Loading Information maximum weight of passengers and cargo that can
be loaded into the vehicle. This information can be
Denitions found on the tire pressure plate.
The Curb weight - actual weight of your vehicle The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the sum
- vehicle weight including standard and optional of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
equipment, fluids and emergency tools. This weight and production options weight.
weight does not include passengers and cargo. The load rating is the maximum load that a tire is
The Gross Vehicle Weight is sum of the curb rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo The maximum load rating is the load rating for a
combined. tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maxi- The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of
mum total weight of vehicle, passengers, luggage cargo, the subtracted weight of passengers from
and optional equipment. the load limit.
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum Never exceed the permissible limits.
load limit for the front or the rear axle. This
information is located on the safety compliance
sticker located in the driver’s side door jamb. Danger!

For determining the compatibility of the tire and Risk of loss of control, damage to the vehicle
vehicle load capabilities: and serious personal injury or death.

Please observe the chapter ”TECHNICAL Never exceed the specified axle loads.
DATA” on page 328. Overloading can shorten the service life of
the tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “100”) is a
vehicle reactions and long braking distances.
minimum requirement.
Damage due to overloading is not covered by
The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maxi- the vehicle warranty.
mum total weight rating of vehicle, passengers and
cargo.
The Vehicle Capacity Weight - Load Limit - is the
maximum total weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the

278 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example for determining the combined weight of occupants and cargo

Vehicle Load Capacity Determining the combined weight of occupants 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and cargo: and passengers that will be riding in your
The combined weight of occupants and cargo vehicle.
should never exceed the weight shown on the Add the weight of all occupants and then add
the total luggage weight (gure). 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
tire plate in the vehicle.
and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
Please observe the chapter ”TIRE PRESSURE Steps for determining correct load limit pounds.
PLATE” on page 327.
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of 4. The resulting figure equals the available
Never exceed the number of passengers occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle. pounds" on your vehicle’s placard (depending For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400
on the date of manufacture). lbs. and there will be five - 150 lb passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 -
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 279

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.

280 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Flat Tire
Caution!
General information Sealing the tire with the tire repair kit is only
an emergency repair. Even with the tire
Warning! air-tight, it may be used only for short trips
in an emergency. The maximum permitted
Failure to follow these instructions may result
speed is 50 mph (80 km/h).
in serious personal injury or death to you or to
bystanders. Do not use commercially available sealant or
tire inflating bottles. Use only the tire sealant
If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance
located in the luggage compartment.
off the road. Turn the emergency flasher on
and use other warning devices to alert other
motorists. Set the parking brake.
Warning!
Do not park your vehicle where it may contact
dry grass, brush or other flammable materials. Risk of accident, resulting in serious personal
The hot parts of the exhaust system could set injury or death.
such materials on fire, thereby causing both
Have tires replaced by a specialist workshop A - Filler bottle
property damage and serious personal injury
as soon as possible. B - Filler hose
or death.
Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
A tire sealant and compressor with pressure tester
speeds. Tire sealant
are located in the luggage compartment.
Usage
Please observe the safety and operating
The tire sealant can be used to seal small cuts,
instructions on the special sealant bottle with
especially in the tire tread.
a special Porsche part number and on the
compressor - these are essential. Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
workshop. Even with the tire air-tight, it may be
used only for short trips in an emergency.
The tire sealant and a compressor with pressure
tester can be found in the luggage compartment.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 281

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The tire sealant comprises: Do not inhale vapors, due to consequent harm
to personal health resulting in serious personal
– A filler bottle
injury or death.
– A sticker denoting the maximum permissible
speed for the driver’s field of vision
– A filler hose In case of contact with the sealant:
– A valve turner and If sealant gets on the skin or in the eyes,
– A spare valve insert. thoroughly rinse the affected part of the body
off immediately.
Danger! Change soiled clothing immediately.
Risk of accident, resulting in serious personal Get medical attention immediately in the event
injury or death. of an allergic reaction.
Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or If sealant was swallowed, thoroughly rinse out
punctures no larger than 0.15 in. (4 mm). the mouth without delay and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting. Get medical
Never use the tire sealant if the rim is dam-
attention immediately. A - Filler bottle
aged.
B - Filler hose
C - Plug of the ller hose
D - Valve turner
Warning! E - Valve insert
F - Tire valve
The sealant is highly ammable and harmful
to health.
Inserting sealant:
Fire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling tire sealant. 1. Leave the object that caused the puncture in
the tire.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing
due to caustic chemical properties of the tire 2. Remove sealant and the enclosed sticker from
sealant. the luggage compartment.

Keep tire sealant away from children. 3. Adhere the sticker in the driver’s field of vision.
4. Shake filler bottle A.

282 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle. The Care Instructions
filler bottle is now open.
After drying, any sealant that emerges can be
6. Unscrew valve cap from tire valve F. peeled off like a film.
7. Remove valve insert E from the tire valve with
valve turner D. Keep the valve insert in a clean Warning!
and dry place. Risk of accident, resulting in serious personal
8. Remove plug C of the filler hose B. injury or death.
9. Push filler hose onto the tire valve. Have the tire replaced by an authorized
10. Hold filler bottle higher than the level of the tire Porsche dealer immediately.
valve and press it together forcefully until the Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
bottle is completely emptied into the tire. speeds.
11. Pull filler hose off the tire valve. Do not exceed maximum speed of 50 mph
12. Twist the valve insert firmly into the tire valve (80 km/h).
using the valve turner. Please always observe the safety and oper-
13. Connect the compressor to the cigarette ating instructions, which can be found in the A - Front jacking point
lighter and inflate the tire to the prescribed tire separate operating instructions for the sealant
pressure. and on the compressor.
Lifting the vehicle
Please observe the chapter ”TIRE PRESSURES
FOR COLD TIRES” on page 334. Lifting the vehicle with a lifting platform or
14. Screw valve cap onto the tire valve. garage lift
15. Check the tire pressure after driving for The car must be raised only at the illustrated
around 10 minutes. If the tire pressure is jacking points.
less than 22 psi (1.5 bar), do not continue
driving. If a value of more than 22 psi (1.5 bar)
is indicated, correct the pressure to the
prescribed value.
16. Please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 283

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do not damage any sensitive components in
the vicinity of the jacking points.

Platform lift
Before the car is driven on to a lifting platform,
it must be ensured that there is enough space
between the lifting platform and the vehicle.

Garage lift
A garage lift may be used only at the illustrated
jacking points.

B - Rear jacking point

Caution!
Serious personal injury or death and/or
serious damage to the engine or the vehicle
may occur, if you lift the vehicle improperly.
Never lift the vehicle at any other place than
the jacking points.
Never lift the vehicle by the engine, transmis-
sion or axles.

284 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Apply a thin coat of Optimoly TA (aluminum On request, separate anti-theft protection for the
paste) on the thread and between the bolt wheel nuts can be mounted. Please consult an
head and movable spherical cap ring (arrows). authorized Porsche dealer.
The bearing surface of the spherical cap
facing the wheel must not be greased.
Replace damaged wheel bolts. Only use
the Original Porsche wheel bolts specially
designed for this vehicle type.

Tightening torque
Tightening torque of wheel bolts and wheel nuts:
130 Nm/96 ftlb.

Wheel Securing Bolts

If the wheels have to be removed at the workshop,
please do not forget to hand over the wrench
socket for the wheel securing bolts along with
Wheel Bolts the car key.

General information The wrench socket for the wheel securing bolts is
in the tool box.
Danger! To loosen or tighten the wheel bolt with anti-theft
protection, a wrench socket with the appropriate
Risk of wheel bolt breakage and wheel
coding must be used between the wheel bolt and
separation, resulting in serious personal
the wheel-bolt spanner.
injury or death.
When positioning the wrench socket, ensure
Follow all instructions concerning wheel bolts. that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel
bolt.
Always clean the wheel bolts before fitting. Note on operation
On vehicles with 17 mm spacers on the rear
axle, the wheels are secured with wheel nuts.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 285

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Spacers Please observe the chapter ”5 MM SPACERS” 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S,
on page 288. 911 Targa 4, 911 Targa 4S
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S Please observe the chapter ”CHANGING A
WHEEL” on page 287. General information
General information
Use the spacers only together with wheels
Use the spacers only together with wheels and fastening parts approved by Porsche.
and fastening parts approved by Porsche. Before having spacers fitted, find out about the
Before having spacers fitted, find out about the current approval status.
current approval status.
Danger!
Mounting an emergency spare wheel
Risk of accident. 17 mm spacers must only
If 5 mm spacers are mounted, these must not be
be mounted on the rear axle together with
removed to mount an emergency spare wheel.
11.5 J x 19 (67 mm rim offset) wheels.
Fitting snow chains Always remove 17 mm spacers before
The use of snow chains is not permitted when mounting other wheel sizes or an emergency
5 mm spacers are mounted. spare wheel because the wheel cannot be
mounted correctly.

Caution!
Note on operation
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
5 mm spacers are not removed before tting To fit/remove the spacers: Please consult an
snow chains. authorized Porsche dealer.
To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the Please observe the chapter ”17 MM SPAC-
5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels. ERS” on page 290.
Please observe the chapter ”CHANGING A
Note on operation WHEEL” on page 287.

To fit/remove the spacers: Please consult an

authorized Porsche dealer.

286 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing a wheel
General information

Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or death. The
car may slip off the jack.
Make sure that no one is in the vehicle when
jacking up and changing a wheel.
Always place the car on stable supports if work
has to be carried out under the car.

Warning!
Risk of damage to the brake discs of the Screw in assembly aid for vehicles without Screw in two assembly aids for vehicles with
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB). Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake
Always screw in both assembly aids when
changing a wheel. 2. Secure the car against rolling away, e.g. by 5. Remove 1 or 2 wheel bolts (see respective
means of wedges under the wheels on the illustration). Screw in assembly aids instead of
opposite side. This is particularly important on the wheel bolts. Remove the remaining wheel
Note
slopes. bolts.
The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g.
3. Slightly slacken the wheel bolts of the wheel to Note on operation
jack, wheel bolt wrench, assembly aids) are
be changed.
not supplied with the car. Your authorized To remove or mount the spacers:
Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you. 4. Raise the car until the wheel lifts off the
Please observe the chapter ”5 MM SPACERS”
ground.
on page 288.
Procedure Please observe the chapter ”LIFTING THE
Please observe the chapter ”17 MM SPAC-
1. Fully apply the handbrake, engage 1st gear or VEHICLE WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM OR
ERS” on page 290.
select position P and withdraw the ignition key. GARAGE LIFT” on page 283.
6. Take the wheel off and put a new wheel on.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 287

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. Screw in wheel bolts; remove assembly aids 4. Remove the pressure gauge. 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
and screw in the remaining wheel bolts. Initially
Please observe the chapter ”TPC TIRE
tighten bolts in diagonally opposite sequence
PRESSURE MONITORING” on page 127.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel
so that the wheel is centered.
If 5 mm spacers are mounted, these must not be
Please observe the chapter ”WHEEL BOLTS” removed to mount an emergency spare wheel.
on page 285.
Fitting snow chains
8. Lower the car completely.
The use of snow chains is not permitted when
9. Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite
5 mm spacers are mounted.
sequence.
Immediately after changing a wheel, use
Caution!
a torque wrench to check the prescribed
tightening torque (130 Nm/96 ftlb). Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
5 mm spacers are not removed before tting
Checking tire pressure with a pressure snow chains.
gauge To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire. 5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels.

2. Press the pressure gauge onto the valve stem.

To fit/remove the spacers: Please consult an
Note on operation
authorized Porsche dealer.
Do not press too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape. If the sound of air 5 mm spacers
escaping from the tire is heard, reposition the
pressure gauge. Required scope of parts if the spacers are
3. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and removed
compare it to the permissible tire pressure. Short countersunk screws (M6x12) Part No:
This information can be found on the tire 900.269.047.09
pressure plate in the left door aperture or in
the chapter Technical Data. 1 set short wheel bolts Part No: 996.361.203.02

Please observe the chapter ”TIRE PRESSURES Short anti-theft protection Part No:
FOR COLD TIRES” on page 334. 996.361.057.01

288 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. For wheel mounting without a spacer,
5 mm shorter wheel bolts (part No.:
996.361.203.02) must be used. Tighten-
ing torque: 130 Nm (96 ftlb.).
Please observe the chapter ”CHANGING A
WHEEL” on page 287.

Mounting the spacers

1. Remove wheel.
2. Unscrew both countersunk screws (M6x12) on
the break disc.
3. Fasten the spacer with the long M6x16
countersunk screws. Tightening torque
10 Nm (7.5 ftlb.).
4. Fit wheel. To do this use the longer wheel
bolts for fastening the wheels. Tightening Long wheel bolt
For information on the spacers: torque: 130 Nm (96 ftlb.).
- X: Bolt length approx. 50 mm
Please observe the chapter ”SPACERS” on Please observe the chapter ”CHANGING A - Arrows: marks
page 286. WHEEL” on page 287.

Removing the spacers Wheel bolt identifying features

1. Unscrew both countersunk screws (M6x16) on The long wheel bolts are identified on the face
the wheel hub. surface of the bolt head with GT or in red, or the
moveable spherical cap ring is galvanised in red.
2. Remove the spacer.
The long wheel bolts must only be used together
3. Fasten the brake disc with the short with 5 mm spacers fitted.
M6x12 countersunk screws, part No.:
The short wheel bolts are not marked in colour.
900.269.047.09. Tightening torque
The short wheel bolts must only be used without
10 Nm (7.5 ftlb.).
5 mm spacers fitted.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 289

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tightening torque for both wheel bolts: 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S,
130 Nm (96 ftlb.). 911 Targa 4, 911 Targa 4S
17 mm spacers

Danger!
Risk of accident. 17 mm spacers must only
be mounted on the rear axle together with
11.5 J x 19 (67 mm rim offset) wheels.
Always remove 17 mm spacers before
mounting other wheel sizes or an emergency
spare wheel because the wheel cannot be
mounted correctly.

For information on the spacers:

Please observe the chapter ”SPACERS” on 5. Insert wheel bolts A and tighten by hand.
page 286. Remove assembly aids, screw in remaining
wheel bolts. Initially tighten bolts slightly in
Removing the spacers diagonally opposite sequence so that the
1. Unscrew the wheel bolts A with which the wheel is centred.
spacer is fastened. Please observe the chapter ”WHEEL BOLTS”
2. Remove the spacer. on page 285.
3. Screw in 1 or 2 assembly aids instead of the 6. Lower the car completely.
wheel bolts. 7. Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite
4. Fit wheel. sequence.
Immediately after changing a wheel,
use a torque wrench to check the pre-
scribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts
(130 Nm/96 ftlb.).

290 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Store spacer and wheel nuts together.

Mounting the spacers

1. Remove wheel.
2. Fit the spacer with the wheel bolts A used to
fasten the wheel. Initially tighten the wheel
bolts slightly in diagonally opposite sequence.
3. Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally oppo-
site sequence. Tightening torque:
130 Nm (96 ftlb.).
4. Fit wheel. To do this use the original wheel nuts
for fastening the wheels. Tightening torque:
130 Nm (96 ftlb.).
Please observe the chapter ”CHANGING A
WHEEL” on page 287.
On request, separate anti-theft protection for the
wheel nuts can be mounted.
Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 291

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical System
General information
In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or
electronic systems, electrical accessories should
be installed at your authorized Porsche dealer.
Only use accessories authorized by Porsche.

Warning!
Risk of short circuit and re, resulting in
serious personal injury or death. Replacing
fuses or relays with the engine running or the
ignition on could cause electrical shock.
Disconnect the battery during all work on the
electrical system.
In storage tray between the front seats In the passenger’s footwell
Please observe the chapter ”BATTERY” on
page 295.
Sockets Note on operation
Electrical accessories should preferably be The sockets and thus the connected electrical
connected to the 12 V sockets. accessories will function even if the ignition is
Relays switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn.
Please observe the maximum power consump-
Defective relays should be changed only by an tion. If the engine is not running and the accessories are
authorized workshop. switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged.
Note on operation
Do not operate additional accessories for more
The tire filling compressor must be connected to than 5 minutes when engine is off. Continuing to
the cigarette lighter. do so may drain the battery such that it may go
completely dead.
Maximum power consumption for both
sockets together: 70 W.

292 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Please observe the power specifications from
the accessory manufacturer.

Alarm system, central locking

The status of the central locking and alarm system
is not changed by disconnecting the battery. When
the battery is disconnected, the alarm system
ceases to function.

Overload protection
If the central locking system is operated more
than ten times within a minute, further operation is
blocked for 30 seconds.

Load switch-off after 2 hours or 7 days

If the ignition key is removed, loads which are
switched on or are in standby mode (such as the A - Diagnostic socket A - Plastic gripper
luggage compartment light, interior light and B - Spare fuses
radio) are automatically switched off after approx. Replacing fuses
2 hours. 1. Switch off the load with the defective fuse.
In order to prevent damage to the electrical system
If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the due to short circuits and overloads, the individual 2. Pull off plastic cover at the finger hole (arrow).
remote control within 7 days, the remote control circuits are protected by fuses. The fuse box is The fuse plan and instructions for emer-
standby function is switched off (to save the vehicle located in the driver’s footwell. gency unlocking of the luggage compart-
battery). ment lid can be found on the inner side of the
1. In this case, unlock the driver’s door with the cover.
key at the door lock. Leave the door closed in 3. Remove the corresponding fuse from its slot
order to prevent the alarm system from being using the plastic gripper A in order to check it.
triggered. A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
2. Press button 1 on the remote control. metal strip.

The remote control is now activated again. 4. Replace only with fuses of the same rating.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 293

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note
If a fuse blows repeatedly consult an author-
ized Porsche dealer.
Never try to “repair” fuses: you may cause
serious damage to other parts of the electrical
system.

Emergency unlocking of the luggage

compartment lid
If the battery is discharged, the lid can be opened
only with the aid of a donor battery.
Unlocking lid
1. Use the key to unlock the vehicle at the door
lock.
2. Remove plastic cover over the fuse box.
3. Pull out positive terminal A in the fuse box. Note 7. Disconnect the negative cable first, then the
positive cable.
4. Use a jumper cable to connect the positive If the vehicle was locked, the alarm horn will sound
terminal of the donor battery with positive when the negative cable is connected. 8. Push the positive terminal A into the fuse box
terminal A in the fuse box. and push on the plastic fuse box cover.
5. Use the second jumper cable to connect the
negative terminal of the donor battery with Note
latch striker B.
The engine cannot be started with this method.
6. Unlock the luggage compartment lid with the
Please observe the chapter ”EMERGENCY
remote control. The alarm system is switched
STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on page
off.
300.

294 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Battery Do not allow battery acid to come in contact Eliminate potential electrostatic charge by
with your skin, eyes, fabric or painted surfac- touching the vehicle before touching the
General information es. battery.
If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
Warning! eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with
Risk of short circuit and re, resulting in cold water for several minutes and call a Charge state
serious personal injury or death. doctor.
A well charged battery will not only prevent starting
Spilled electrolyte must be rinsed off at once problems but will also last longer.
Observe all warning notes on the battery.
with a solution of baking soda and water to
Disconnect the battery during all work on the neutralize the acid. In order to avoid discharging the battery
electrical system. unintentionally:
Do not lay tools or other metal objects on the Switch off unnecessary electrical loads in city
battery as they could cause a short circuit Warning! traffic, on short trips or in a line or traffic.
across the battery terminal. Always remove the ignition key from the
Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds, ignition switch when leaving the car.
chemicals known to the State of California to Avoid frequent operation of the convertible top
Warning! cause cancer and reproductive harm. and operation of the Porsche Communication
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery Always protect your skin by washing thorough- Management system when the engine is not
could cause an explosion, resulting in serious ly with soap and water. running.
personal injury or death.
Do not expose the battery to an open flame,
electrical spark or a lit cigarette. Warning!
Do not wipe battery with a dry cloth. Risk of explosion as a result of static charge,
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
Do not wipe the battery with a dry cloth.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or death and
damage to the fabric, metal or paint.
Wear eye protection.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 295

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Battery care Battery charging Slow battery charging
Automotive batteries loose their efficiency when 1. Pay attention to all warnings and follow
Ensure that battery is securely mounted.
not in use. The charge available in your battery instructions that come with your battery
Keep terminals and connections clean can be measured with a battery hydrometer. We charger.
and properly tightened. Corrosion can be recommend that the battery voltage be tested
2. When charging, ensure adequate ventilation.
prevented by coating the terminals and by your Porsche dealer who has the appropriate
connections with petroleum jelly or silicone equipment. 3. Remove battery.
spray.
If the car is not driven for prolonged periods, the Please observe the chapter ”REMOVING THE
Ensure that vent caps are securely tightened battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks. BATTERY” on page 297.
to prevent spillage. A discharged battery allows rapid formation of 4. All vent caps should be open. The fluid level
sulfates, leading to premature deterioration of the should meet the indicator mark in each cell.
Checking the electrolyte uid level plates.
5. Ensure that charger is switched off - danger of
Generally, the electrolyte level must be checked
short circuit!
more often in summer than in the winter, and more Danger!
often when driving long distances. 6. Connect charger cables. Charger cables
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery must be connected POSITIVE (+) to POSI-
When adding water, use only clean containers. could cause an explosion, resulting in serious TIVE (+) and NEGATIVE (-) to NEGATIVE (-).
In no case may alcohol (e.g. window cleaner personal injury or death.
residues) be permitted to enter the battery. 7. Switch on charger. Normally, a battery should
Charge battery in a well ventilated area. be charged at no more than 10 percent of its
Unscrew and open the filler vent caps of each
Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode rated capacity. Rated capacity of the battery in
cell.
because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a your vehicle is listed on the battery housing.
With the car on a level surface, the fluid level should frozen battery to thaw out first. 8. After charging, turn off charger and disconnect
meet the indicator mark in each cell.
If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your charger cables.
If necessary, top up with distilled water. eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with 9. Tighten the vent caps and reinstall battery.
Do not use acid. Only fill up to the mark, cold water for several minutes and call a
otherwise the electrolyte will overflow when doctor. Please observe the chapter ”INSTALLING THE
the battery is being charged and cause BATTERY” on page 298.
damage.
Winter operation
The capacity and ability of the battery to store
power decreases at low outside temperatures.

296 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Additionally, more power is consumed while 2. With the vehicle stationary, perform a few Removing the battery
starting, and the headlights, heater, rear window steering movements to the left and right and
The required tool is in the tool kit.
defogger, etc., are used more frequently. then drive a short distance in a straight line
until the multifunctinal PSM light goes out The battery is located in the luggage compartment
Let your Porsche dealer test the battery’s
and the message on the on-board computer under a black plastic lid.
capacity before winter sets in.
disappears.
The battery will discharge more quickly if your Warning!
3. If the warnings do not disappear, then: Drive
vehicle is not driven on a daily basis over a distance
carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche Risk of damage to alternator and electronic
of several miles. The more often you drive your
dealer. Have the fault remedied. control units.
vehicle, and the longer the distance driven on each
trip, the more opportunity the vehicle’s charging 4. After the warnings disappear: Stop the vehicle Do not disconnect the battery while the engine
system will have to recharge the batteries. in a suitable place. is running. This also applies to cars equipped
5. Perform adaptation of the power windows: with a battery main switch.
Replacing battery
Please observe the chapter ”STORING END Never drive the car with a disconnected
The service life of the battery is subject to normal POSITION OF THE WINDOWS” on page 33. battery.
wear; it depends greatly on care, climatic condi-
tions, and driving conditions (distances, loads). Ignition key/ignition lock
Only use an original Porsche battery, with the Do not insert the ignition key into the ignition Warning!
correct part number, as a replacement. lock if the vehicle battery is discharged. The
Risk of caustic burns from escaping acid.
Please observe the disposal instructions for ignition key can no longer be removed.
batteries. The key cannot be removed until the vehicle Keep vent caps on to avoid spillage.
electrical system is supplied with power again. Do not tilt the battery when removing and
Putting vehicle into operation installing it.
Please observe the chapter ”EMERGENCY
After the battery is connected or after an com- UNLOCKING OF THE LUGGAGE COMPART-
pletely discharged battery is charged, the mul- MENT LID” on page 294.
tifunctional PSM light lights up on the instrument
panel and a message appears on the on-board Please observe the chapter ”EMERGENCY
computer to indicate a fault. STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on page
300.
This fault can be remedied with a few simple steps:
1. Start the engine.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 297

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
Important: connect the positive (+) cable first,
and then the negative (-) ground wire.

3. Important: connect the positive (+) cable first,

and then the negative (-) ground wire – risk of
short circuit!
4. Push on central vent hose C.
5. Fit plastic lid. Lock turn-locks A.

1. Switch off engine and all electrical loads. 4. Important: disconnect the negative (-) ground
wire first, and then the positive (+) cable –
2. Open turn-locks A. Remove plastic lid.
danger of short circuit!
3. Pull off central vent hose C.
5. Unscrew fastening screw B.

Danger! 6. Remove battery.

Risk of short circuit and explosion, resulting in

Installing the battery
serious personal injury or death.
1. Put battery in and push it all the way to the
Important: disconnect the negative (-) ground stop.
wire first, and then the positive (+) cable.
2. Screw in fastening screw B.

298 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note
Please dispose of batteries in compliance with
any and all government regulations.

Replacing the remote-control battery

The battery should be changed when the range of
the radio remote control becomes smaller or when
the light-emitting diode no longer flashes when the
remote control is operated.
1. Using your finger nail or a small screwdriver,
carefully lift off the cover of the key grip
(arrow).
2. Replace the battery (paying attention to the
polarity). Replacement battery - Lithium CR
2032, 3 volts
3. Replace the cover and press together firmly.
Please observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 299

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency Starting with Jumper
Warning! Warning!
Cables
Risk of short circuit, damage and explosion, Danger of caustic burns.
General information resulting in serious personal injury or death.
Do not lean over the battery.
If the battery is discharged, e.g. in winter or after Use only jumper cables of adequate diameter
the car has been parked for a long time, the battery cross-section and fitted with completely
of another car can be used for starting with the insulated alligator clips.
Warning!
help of jumper cables. Make sure the voltage of Follow all warnings and instructions of the
both batteries is the same. Both batteries must Danger of gas explosion.
jumper cable manufacturer.
be 12 volt types. The capacity (Ampere hours, Ah) Improper use of booster battery to start a
of the booster battery must not be substantially When connecting jumper cables, make sure
that they cannot get caught in any moving vehicle may cause an explosion, resulting in
less than that of the discharged battery. The serious personal injury or death.
discharged battery must be correctly connected to parts in the engine compartment. The jumper
the vehicle’s electrical system. cables must be long enough so that neither Keep sources of ignition away from the
vehicles nor cables touch another. battery, e.g. open flame, burning cigarettes or
Please observe the chapter ”BATTERY” on sparking due to cable contact or welding work.
page 295. The vehicles must not be in contact, otherwise
current might flow as soon as the positive A discharged battery can freeze even at
Please observe the chapter ”EMERGENCY terminals are connected. 23°F /-5°C . Before connecting jumper cables,
UNLOCKING OF THE LUGGAGE COMPART- a frozen battery must be thawed out.
MENT LID” on page 294. The cable clamps must not be allowed to
contact each other when one end of the
Note jumper cables are connected to a battery.
Do not try to start the car by pushing or Ensure that tools or conductive jewelry (rings, Connect jumper cables in the following
towing. Damage to the catalytic converters chains, watch straps) do not come into contact sequence:
and other components of the car may result. with the positive jumper cable or the positive
battery post. Always observe the sequence below:

Improper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin 1. Connect the positive lead (red) to the
the alternator. positive terminal of the discharged battery
first, then connect it to the positive terminal of
the donor battery.

300 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. First connect the negative cable (black) to
the negative terminal of the donor battery,
then connect it to a suitable grounding point on
the vehicle with the discharged battery. This
grounding point must lie as far as possible
from the battery. For example, a solid metal
part or the engine block are suitable grounding
points. If no suitable grounding points are to
be found on either vehicle, the negative cable
must carefully be connected directly to the
negative terminal of the battery. If a suitable
grounding point is to be found only on the
donor vehicle, the negative cable must first be
connected to the terminal of the discharged
battery, then to the grounding point of the
donor vehicle.
3. Run the engine of the donor car at a higher
speed.
4. Start the engine. An attempted start using
jumper cables should not last more than
15 seconds. Then allow a waiting period of
at least one minute.
Note
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, electrical
loads such as the heated rear window and the
heating fan blower should be switched on (the
vehicle’s lights must not be switched on). This
reduces voltage peaks which may occur when
disconnecting the jumper cables.
With the engine running, remove both jumper
cables in reverse order.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 301

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lights, Replacing Bulbs
Caution!
General information Risk of damage to headlights due to excessive
temperatures and abrasion.
Warning!
Attach no coverings (e.g. films, “stone
Risk of short circuit. guards”) in the area of the headlights.
Always switch off the relevant components Use soapy water only to clean light lenses
when changing bulbs. and plastic headlight lenses. In no case may
chemical cleaners or other volatile cleaning
fluids be used.
Warning! To prevent scratches, do not rub with a dry or
merely moist cloth, tissue or insect sponges.
Risk of serious personal injury or death. The
Bi Xenon headlights are under high voltage
when installed.
Be careful during all work in the area of the Bi
Xenon headlights.

Caution!
Risk of damage. Bulbs of a higher wattage
can damage the lamp housing.
Only the bulbs shown in the chart may be used.

New bulbs must be clean and free from oil,

grease and fingerprints. Therefore, never
touch bulbs with your bare hands. Use a
cloth or soft paper while replacing bulbs.

302 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Bulb chart

Type, rating

Halogen low beam H7, 55 W

Low beam with Bi-Xenon headlight Philips, D2S 35 W

Halogen high beam H9, 65 W

Additional high beam with Bi-Xenon headlight H11, 55 W

Fog light H8, 35 W

Tail light, rear fog light P21/4 W

Brake light/tail light P21/4 W

Tail light, reflector P21/5 W

Make-up mirror light K3 W

Reversing light P21

Turn signal indicator light, front and rear PY21 W

Turn signal indicator light, side WY5 W

Side marker light W3 W

Door guard-/Curb light W5 W

Parking light, front W5 W Blue-Vision

License plate light C5 W

Luggage compartment-/engine compartment light, interior light K10 W

Reading light 6 W Xenon

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 303

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Headlights
General information

Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to abrasion
and excessive temperatures.
Do not affix any coverings (e.g. “stone guards”
or films) in the area of the headlights.

Note
The headlights can mist up depending on the
temperature and humidity.
To ensure optimum ventilation, do not cover
the gap between headlight and body (e.g.
“stone guards” or films). Removing headlights 2. Remove rubber plug B from the unlocking
opening.
1. Unscrew plastic nut A. Detach the side
carpeting.

304 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installing
1. Insert headlight into the guide rails and push
fully into the fender.
2. Push headlight to the rear and at the same
time turn the socket wrench until it points
horizontally to the rear C. The headlight
locking device must perceptibly and audibly
engage.
3. Insert the rubber plug into the unlocking
opening and secure the carpet. Check the
function of all lights.

3. Place socket wrench (tool kit) on the unlocking Low beam, high beam and additional high
spindle. The handle of the wrench should point beam
horizontally to the rear.
4. Turn socket wrench approx. 180° A. The Opening the lid of the headlight housing
headlight is unlocked and pushed forward 1. Unscrew the 4 screws A.
slightly during this process.
2. First lift release tab B, then push both release
5. Turn socket wrench back until it is pointing tabs C upwards and take off lid.
vertically downward B and leave in position.
6. The headlight is now unlocked and can be
pulled forward out of the fender.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 305

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Halogen headlights: Changing bulb for low Bi-Xenon headlight: Changing bulb for low 2. Disengage both fixing loops A.
beam beam and high beam 3. Replace defective bulb B. When doing so,
1. Pull off plug A. 1. Turn the plug counter-clockwise (bayonet lock) ensure bulb is seated properly.
and pull it off. 4. Engage both fixing loops A, push on plug and
2. Disengage fixing loop B.
turn right as far as the stop.
3. Replace defective bulb. When doing so,
ensure bulb is seated properly.
4. Reassemble in reverse order.

306 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing bulb for high beam or additional high 2. Pull both plug release tabs apart. Pull plug out
beam (Bi-Xenon headlight) of the bulb holder.
1. Turn the bulb holder. Turn it counter-clockwise 3. Replace the defective bulb with bulb holder.
on the left headlight and clockwise on the right 4. Reassemble in reverse order.
headlight. Take bulb holder out of the headlight
housing. Closing lid of headlight housing
1. Push on lid until it perceptibly engages.
2. Fasten lid with the 4 screws.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 307

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Parking light
Changing bulbs for parking light, turn 2. Remove auxiliary headlight. Ensure that the
B - Turn signal
signal light and fog light vent hose D is not lost when the auxiliary
C - Fog light
headlight is pulled out.
D - Vent hose
Removing auxiliary headlight
The release card for the auxiliary headlights is
inside the vehicle folder.
1. Insert release card at the side of the auxiliary
headlight. The auxiliary headlight is released
by pushing in the card. The card may have
to be pushed again to release the second
connection.

308 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Bulb for parking light A Bulb for turn signal B Bulb for fog light C
1. Turn holder towards the left and pull it out to 1. Turn holder counter-clockwise (bayonet lock) 1. Press the release tab of the plug and pull plug
the rear. and remove it. off.
2. Pull out and replace defective bulb. 2. Turn the defective bulb counter-clockwise 2. Turn bulb of the defective left fog light towards
(bayonet lock) and replace it. the left and the bulb of the right fog light
3. Push holder back in and turn towards the right.
towards the right (bayonet lock) and replace
3. Insert holder and turn towards the right.
them.
3. Push on plug.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 309

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installing auxiliary headlight Push auxiliary headlight into the front apron
Caution! until it is felt to engage.
Ensure that the cables are inside the guide
(arrows) properly. Risk of paint damage if the auxiliary headlight
is inserted into the front apron when tilted.
Exercise caution when inserting the auxiliary
headlight into the guides of the front apron.
Ensure that the guide of the housing is inserted
into the guide A of the front apron.

310 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing bulb for side marker light 3. Swivel out the indicator light and undo bulb
holder (bayonet lock).
1. Remove the cap in the wheel housing liner with
a screwdriver. 4. Remove the bulb from the holder and replace
it. Insert holder. Check operation of the light.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the opening in the
wheel housing liner parallel to the turn signal 5. Insert the turn signal’s retaining lugs A into the
housing (in direction of travel). By pressing side section at the front. Push in turn signal
with the screwdriver, disengage the securing until the securing spring B is felt to engage.
spring of the turn signal housing.
6. Press the cap into the wheel housing liner.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 311

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Reversing light
Tail Light B - Turn signal
7. Insert tail light into the side section. Ensure
that the retaining lug has been inserted into the
C - Tail light/brake light
Changing bulb D - Tail light/reector
mounting guide properly.
1. Open the engine compartment lid. E - Rear fog light/side marker light 8. Tighten fastening screw A on the tail light.
2. Completely unscrew fastening screw A. 9. Check operation of the light.
4. Turn the bulb holder in the tail light housing
3. Pull tail light out towards the back.
counter-clockwise and pull it out.
5. Turn the defective bulb counter-clockwise
(bayonet lock) and replace it.
6. Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise.

312 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Additional brake lights
The light-emitting diodes of the additional brake
lights cannot be replaced individually.
Have the defective brake light replaced at an
authorized Porsche dealer.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 313

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 License Plate Light
Changing bulb
1. Unscrew both screws A and remove the light
lens.
2. Remove defective bulb from between the
contact springs and replace it.
3. Reassemble in reverse order. Check operation
of the light.

314 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example: Luggage compartment light

Luggage Compartment-/Engine
Compartment-/Footwell Light
Changing bulb
1. With a screwdriver (arrow), carefully push out
the light.
2. Remove defective bulb from between the
contact springs and replace it.
3. Insert the light into the cut-out, first from one
side then from the other. Check operation.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 315

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Door Guard-/Curb Light
Changing bulb
1. With a screwdriver (arrow), carefully push out
the light.
2. Pull bulb holder out of light housing. Remove
defective bulb and replace it.
3. Install bulb holder and insert light.

316 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Interior Light, Reading Lights 2. Reading light: Turn the holder A of the
defective bulb counter-clockwise and pull it
Changing bulb out. Remove bulb and replace. Interior light:
Carefully unclip the light lens on the switch side
1. Carefully pull light housing out of the trim
(arrows) and then detach it. Remove defective
(arrow).
bulb from between the contact springs and
replace. Clip light lens back in.
3. Insert the light housing into the trim, rear end
first. Press front of housing up and click into
place. Check operation of lights.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 317

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Adjusting Headlights For checking the headlight adjustment, the vertical
position of the cutoff of the lowbeam (see fig.)
Adjustment has to be projected on a vertical screen (wall) in
distance of 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) from the front lens of
Please observe the chapter ”LIGHTS, REPLAC-
the headlamp. The correct position of the cutoff
ING BULBS” on page 302.
is 2 in. (5 cm) at 24.6 ft. or 7.5 m (0.4) below a
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to horizontal line, x in. (cm) from ground to the center
drive and the fuel tank completely filled. of the headlamp lens.
The driver’s seat must be loaded by a person or a
165 lbs. (75 kg) weight and the tire pressures must
meet the prescribed values. After being loaded,
the car must be rolled a few meters so that the
suspension can settle.

318 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Floor
The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat and
approximately level.

Screen
The screen upon which headlamp beams are
projected is perpendicular to the floor and the
vehicle’s longitudinal axis, flat, uniformly light in
color, unobstructed, and wide and high enough
to accommodate the vehicle beam patterns to be
aimed.
The screen should be wide enough to provide
at least 1 m (3.3 ft.) of space outboard of the
vehicle’s headlamp spacing.

Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be Adjustment screws

carried out at a specialist workshop with an optical
Detach side carpeting in luggage compart-
adjustment unit.
ment. Unscrew plastic nut A. Open the cover
of the appropriate adjustment screw. The set-
Distance ting is adjusted by turning the hexagon socket
Visual aim shall be performed at not less than screws right or left, as appropriate.
7.5 m (this value is a rounded down conversion
from the 25-foot distance typical of field aim
using a screen). The 7.5 m (24.6 ft.) distance is
measured from the headlamp lens to the viewing
screen.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 319

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B - Headlight vertical adjustment

Vertical adjustment (screw B)

turn clockwise = beam moves down turn
counter-clockwise = beam moves up
Note
Do not alter the lateral adjustment.

320 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Towing Towing hook

General information The towing hook A is stored in the tool box in the
luggage compartment.
Certain state statutes and local ordinances prohibit
towing with a chain, rope or even a tow bar. In
addition, damage to your vehicle may result from Caution!
improper procedures. Consult your authorized Risk of damage to the vehicle.
Porsche dealer for details.
Use the towing hook only for an emergency to
Vehicle towing remove the vehicle off the road. The towing
hook is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto
Flat bed towing is the preferred type of towing the flat bed, tractor or towing apparatus if the
to be used on Porsche vehicles. Under certain vehicle will roll freely. Under no circumstances
circumstances, wheel lifts may be used when the is the vehicle to be secured using the towing
vehicle will not roll. The vehicle must be towed hook.
with all four wheels off the ground, otherwise
damage to the vehicle may result. Never use the towing hook to tow this or any
other vehicle.
Bear in mind the limited ground clearance of
your car on uneven surfaces.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 321

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fitting towing hook Removing towing hook Pulling vehicle onto at bed
When fitting on the rear of the vehicle, the license 1. Unscrew the towing hook A. 1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat
plate must be removed. bed to reduce the angle of the pull.
2. Insert plastic cover at the lower edge of the
1. Press the lower edge of the appropriate opening. 2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside
plastic cover into the bumper until the cover of the vehicle for any interference.
3. Fold the cover up and press on its upper edge
disengages.
to engage it in the bumper.
2. Pull cover out of the bumper and let it hang by
its thread. When removing on the rear of the vehicle, the
license plate must be mounted.
3. Completely screw in the towing hook A.

322 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Secure straps to front of flat bed.
6. Release tension on hoist cable, but do not
disconnect. Use hoist cable as a safety cable.

Tying down vehicle on at bed

1. Carefully feed towing straps through the
opening in the rear wheels. Make sure metal
parts of straps do not damage rim. Make sure
the strap is flat over the rim bead. Make sure
brake backing plate is not damaged.
2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed.
3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension
tie-down straps.
4. Carefully feed towing straps through the
opening in the front wheels. Make sure metal
parts of straps do not damage rim. Make sure
the strap is flat over the rim bead. Make sure
brake backing plate is not damaged.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 323

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 324 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicle Identication, Technical Data
Vehicle Identification .................................... 326
Technical Data ............................................ 328

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 325

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicle Identication
Ordering spare parts
When ordering spare parts or making inquiries,
please always quote the vehicle identification
number.

Vehicle data bank

The vehicle data bank is attached to the inside of
the “Maintenance” booklet. It contains all important
data about your vehicle.
Note
This data bank cannot be re-ordered if it is lost or
damaged.
This label contains the following information:
1. Vehicle Identification No. Vehicle identication number Safety compliance sticker
2. Type/Type description The safety compliance sticker is your assurance
Position that your new Porsche complies with all applica-
3. Engine code/Transmission code
In accordance with Federal Safety Regulations, the ble Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which
4. Paint No./Interior vehicle identification number of your car is located were in effect at the time the vehicle was manufac-
5. Optional equipment at the bottom left of the windshield frame and can tured.
be seen from the outside.
The sticker also shows the month and year of
The vehicle identification number is in the luggage production and the vehicle identification number of
compartment under the battery cover and at the your car (perforations) as well as the Gross Vehicle
bottom left behind the windshield. Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rating.

Removing the battery cover

Please observe the chapter ”BATTERY” on
page 295.

326 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire pressure plate Engine number
The tire pressure plate is attached to the left-hand The engine number is stamped on the underside of
door aperture. the crankcase.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 327

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Technical Data
Engine data

911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S,
911 Targa 4 911 Targa 4S 911 Targa 4S
(increased performance version)

Type M 96/05 M 97/01 M 97/01S

Horizontally opposed engine, Horizontally opposed engine, Horizontally opposed engine,
liquid cooled liquid cooled liquid cooled

Number of cylinders 6 6 6

Bore 3.78 in./96 mm 3.90 in./99 mm 3.90 in./99 mm

Stroke 3.26 in./82.8 mm 3.26 in./82.8 mm 3.26 in./82.8 mm

Cubic capacity 219.4 cu.in./3596 cm³ 233.3 cu.in./3824 cm³ 233.3 cu.in./3824 cm³

Net-horsepower, SAE J 1349 325 hp/239 kW 355 hp/261 kW 381 hp/280 kW

at crankshaft speed 6800 rpm 6600 rpm 7200 rpm

Net torque, SAE J 1349 273 ft.lb./370 Nm 295 ft.lb./400 Nm 307 ft.lb./415 Nm

at crankshaft speed 4250 rpm 4600 rpm 5500 rpm

Engine oil consumption up to 1.5 liters/1000 km up to 1.5 liters/1000 km up to 1.5 liters/1000 km

(1.6 quarts/622 miles) (1.6 quarts/622 miles) (1.6 quarts/622 miles)

Engine control Stationary high-voltage distribution, sequential injection, cylinder-selective knock-control, stereo oxygen sensor closed-
loop control, diagnostic system, 4 overhead camshafts, Porsche VarioCam Plus, hydraulic valve clearance compensa-
tion

328 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Transmission

Manual transmission Tiptronic S

1st gear 3.91 3.60

2nd gear 2.32 2.19

3rd gear 1.61 1.41

4th gear 1.28 1.00

5th gear 1.08 0.83

6th gear 0.88

Reverse 1st gear 3.59 3.17

2nd gear 1.93

Final drive ratio 3.44 3.56

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 329

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tires, Rims, Tracks 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S

Tire Rim Rim offset Track

Summer tires* front 235/40 ZR 18 (91Y) 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm

rear 265/40 ZR 18 (101Y) XL 10 J x 18 H2 58 mm 60.4 in./1534 mm

or front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm

rear 295/30 ZR 19 (100Y) XL 11 J x 19 H2 67 mm 59.7 in./1516 mm

or front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8.5 J x 19 H2 55 mm 58.7 in./1490 mm

rear 305/30 ZR 19 (102Y) XL 11.5 J x 19 H2 67 mm 59.7 in./1516 mm

Snow tires front 235/40 R 18 91V M+S 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm

rear 265/40 R 18 97V M+S1) 10 J x 18 H2 58 mm 60.4 in./1534 mm

or front 235/35 R 19 87V M+S 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm

rear 295/30 R 19 100V XL M+S 11 J x 19 H2 67 mm 59.7 in./1516 mm
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “91”) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. “Y”) are minimum requirements.
Snow chains Can be mounted only on the rear wheels; maximum speed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Use only Porsche authorized fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
Snow chain clearance can be guaranteed only on the tire + rim combination marked1) without spacers.
Tire and rim sizes Extensive tests are performed before specific tires and wheels are approved by Porsche. Your Porsche dealer has informa-
tion about approved tires and wheels and is happy to assist you. If aftermarket tires and/or wheels are installed which are
not approved by Porsche, the vehicle’s driveability, stability while in motion and handling characteristics might be impaired.
Since Porsche has no data on such combinations, Porsche cannot stand behind the safety or durability of these aftermarket
combinations.

* 911 Carrera S: Summer tires 19-inch only

330 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Danger!
Installation of sizes not authorized by Porsche may have a dangerous effect on the driving stability and could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Before mounting new tires, check with your Porsche dealer about the current release status.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 331

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tires, Rims, Tracks 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4, 911 Targa 4S

Tire Rim Rim offset Track

Summer tires* front 235/40 ZR 18 (91Y) 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm

rear 295/35 ZR 18 (99Y) 11 J x 18 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm

or front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm

rear 305/30 ZR 19 (102Y) XL 11 J x 19 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm

or front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8.5 J x 19 H2 55 mm 58.7 in./1492 mm

rear 305/30 ZR 19 (102Y) XL 11.5 J x 19 H2** 67 mm 61.0 in./1550 mm

Snow tires front 235/40 R 18 91V M+S 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm

rear 295/35 R 18 99V M+S1) 11 J x 18 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm

or front 235/35 R 19 87V M+S 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm

rear 295/30 R 19 100V XL M+S1) 11 J x 19 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “91”) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. “Y”) are minimum requirements.
Snow chains Can be mounted only on the rear wheels; maximum speed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Use only Porsche authorized fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
Snow chain clearance can be guaranteed only on the tire + rim combination marked1).
Tire and rim sizes Extensive tests are performed before specific tires and wheels are approved by Porsche. Your Porsche dealer has informa-
tion about approved tires and wheels and is happy to assist you. If aftermarket tires and/or wheels are installed which are not
approved by Porsche, the vehicle’s driveability, stability while in motion and handling characteristics might be impaired. Since
Porsche has no data on such combinations, Porsche cannot stand behind the safety or durability of these aftermarket combi-
nations.

* 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S: Summer tires 19-inch only
** Only approved together with 17 mm spacers

332 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Danger!
Installation of sizes not authorized by Porsche may have a dangerous effect on the driving stability and could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Before mounting new tires, check with your Porsche dealer about the current release status.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 333

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire pressures for cold tires

Summer and snow tires 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S

18 inch wheels front 36 psi (2.5 bar)

rear 44 psi (3.0 bar)

19 inch wheels, partially loaded front 33 psi (2.3 bar)

(up to 2 persons without luggage) rear 39 psi (2.7 bar)

19 inch wheels, fully loaded front 36 psi (2.5 bar)

(as of 2 persons with luggage) rear 44 psi (3.0 bar)

Summer and snow tires 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4, 911 Targa 4S

18 inch and 19 inch wheels, partially loaded front 33 psi (2.3 bar)
(up to 2 persons without luggage) rear 39 psi (2.7 bar)

18 inch and 19 inch wheels, fully loaded front 36 psi (2.5 bar)
(as of 2 persons with luggage) rear 44 psi (3.0 bar)

These tire filling pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
Please observe the chapter ”TIRES/WHEELS” on page 267.
Please observe the chapter ”TPC TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING” on page 127.

334 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Capacities
Use only fluids and fuels authorized by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche dealer will gladly advise you.
Your Porsche has been designed so that it is not necessary to mix any additives with oils or fuels.

Engine 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4: Oil change quantity without oil filter approx. 8.5 quarts / 8.0 liters
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4: Oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 8.7 quarts / 8.25 liters
911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S: Oil change quantity without oil filter approx. 8.7 quarts / 8.25 liters
911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S: Oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 9.0 quarts / 8.5 liters
Please observe the chapter ”ENGINE OIL” on page 235.

Coolant approx. 8.45 U.S.gallons / 32 liters

Manual transmission
and differential approx. 3.1 quarts / 2.9 liters transmission oil

Tiptronic S approx. 9.5 quarts / 9.0 liters ATF

Differential for Tiptronic S approx. 1.3 quarts / 1.2 liter

Fuel tank 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S: approx. 16.9 U.S.gallons / 64 liters
911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4, 911 Targa 4S: approx. 17.7 U.S.gallons / 67 liters

Fuel quality Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using
unleaded premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON (93 CLC or AKI).
Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available. Be assured that your vehicle
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON (90 CLC or AKI),
since the engine’s “Electronic Octane™ knock control” will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.

Power steering approx. 1.35 quarts / 1.27 liter hydraulic fluid Pentosin CHF 11 S®or Pentosin CHF 202®

Brake uid 0.48 quarts / 0.45 liters; use only Original Porsche brake fluid.

Windshield washer approx. 2.6 quarts / 2.5 liters without headlight washer
approx. 6.3 quarts / 6.0 liters with headlight washer

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 335

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Weights Coupc

911 Carrera Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3075 lbs. to 3296 lbs. 3164 lbs. to 3384 lbs.
1395 kg to 1495 kg 1435 kg to 1535 kg

Maximum gross weight 3990 lbs./1810 kg 4090 lbs./1855 kg

1)
Maximum axle load, front 1709 lbs./775 kg 1709 lbs./775 kg

Maximum axle load, rear1) 2601 lbs./1180 kg 2601 lbs./1180 kg

2)
Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System 165 lbs./75 kg 165 lbs./75 kg

911 Carrera S Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3131 lbs. to 3329 lbs. 3219 lbs. to 3417 lbs.
1420 kg to 1510 kg 1460 kg to 1550 kg

Maximum gross weight 4012 lbs./1820 kg 4112 lbs./1865 kg

1)
Maximum axle load, front 1709 lbs./775 kg 1709 lbs./775 kg
1)
Maximum axle load, rear 2601 lbs./1180 kg 2601 lbs./1180 kg

Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System2) 165 lbs./75 kg 165 lbs./75 kg

1)
The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.

Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
2)
Use only Original Porsche Roof Transport System.

336 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Weights Coupc

911 Carrera 4 Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3197 lbs. to 3417 lbs. 3285 lbs. to 3505 lbs.
1450 kg to 1550 kg 1490 kg to 1590 kg

Maximum gross weight 4112 lbs./1865 kg 4211 lbs./1910 kg

1)
Maximum axle load, front 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg

Maximum axle load, rear1) 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg

2)
Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System 165 lbs./75 kg 165 lbs./75 kg

911 Carrera 4S Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3252 lbs. to 3450 lbs. 3340 lbs. to 3538 lbs.
1475 kg to 1565 kg 1515 kg to 1605 kg

Maximum gross weight 4134 lbs./1875 kg 4233 lbs./1920 kg

1)
Maximum axle load, front 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg
1)
Maximum axle load, rear 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg

Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System2) 165 lbs./75 kg 165 lbs./75 kg

1)
The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.

Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
2)
Use only Original Porsche Roof Transport System.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 337

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Weights Cabriolet

911 Carrera Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3263 lbs. to 3439 lbs. 3351 lbs. to 3527 lbs.
1480 kg to 1560 kg 1520 kg to 1600 kg

Maximum gross weight 4134 lbs./1875 kg 4233 lbs./1920 kg

1)
Maximum axle load, front 1709 lbs./775 kg 1709 lbs./775 kg

Maximum axle load, rear1) 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg

911 Carrera S Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3318 lbs. to 3472 lbs. 3406 lbs. to 3560 lbs.
1505 kg to 1575 kg 1545 kg to 1615 kg

Maximum gross weight 4156 lbs./1885 kg 4255 lbs./1930 kg

1)
Maximum axle load, front 1709 lbs./775 kg 1709 lbs./775 kg
1)
Maximum axle load, rear 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg

1)
The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.

Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.

338 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Weights Cabriolet

911 Carrera 4 Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3384 lbs. to 3549 lbs. 3472 lbs. to 3638 lbs.
1535 kg to 1610 kg 1575 kg to 1650 kg

Maximum gross weight 4233 lbs./1920 kg 4332 lbs./1965 kg

1)
Maximum axle load, front 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg

Maximum axle load, rear1) 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg

911 Carrera 4S Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3439 lbs. to 3571 lbs. 3527 lbs. to 3660 lbs.
1560 kg to 1620 kg 1600 kg to 1660 kg

Maximum gross weight 4255 lbs./1930 kg 4354 lbs./1975 kg

1)
Maximum axle load, front 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg
1)
Maximum axle load, rear 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg

1)
The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.

Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 339

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Weights Targa

911 Targa 4 Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3329 lbs. to 3494 lbs. 3417 lbs. to 3583 lbs.
1510 kg to 1585 kg 1550 kg to 1625 kg

Maximum gross weight 4189 lbs./1900 kg 4288 lbs./1945 kg

1)
Maximum axle load, front 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg

Maximum axle load, rear1) 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg

911 Targa 4S Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3384 lbs. to 3527 lbs. 3472 lbs. to 3616 lbs.
1535 kg to 1600 kg 1575 kg to 1640 kg

Maximum gross weight 4222 lbs./1915 kg 4321 lbs./1960 kg

1)
Maximum axle load, front 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg
1)
Maximum axle load, rear 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg

1)
The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.

Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.

340 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Driving Performance Coupc
At DIN empty weight and half load, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment

911 Carrera Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Top track speed 177 mph (285 km/h) 174 mph (280 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.8 seconds 5.2 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 5.0 seconds 5.5 seconds

911 Carrera S Manual transmission Tiptronic S Manual transmission Tiptronic S

(increased performance version) (increased performance version)
Top track speed 182 mph (293 km/h) 177 mph (285 km/h) 187 mph (300 km/h) 183 mph (294 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.6 seconds 5.0 seconds 4.4 seconds 4.8 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 4.8 seconds 5.3 seconds 4.6 seconds 5.1 seconds

911 Carrera 4 Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Top track speed 174 mph (280 km/h) 171 mph (275 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.9 seconds 5.3 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 5.1 seconds 5.6 seconds

911 Carrera 4S Manual transmission Tiptronic S Manual transmission Tiptronic S

(increased performance version) (increased performance version)
Top track speed 179 mph (288 km/h) 174 mph (280 km/h) 184 mph (296 km/h) 180 mph (290 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.6 seconds 5.0 seconds 4.4 seconds 4.8 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 4.8 seconds 5.3 seconds 4.6 seconds 5.1 seconds

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 341

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Driving Performance Cabriolet, Targa
At DIN empty weight and half load, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment

911 Carrera Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Top track speed 177 mph (285 km/h) 174 mph (280 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 5.0 seconds 5.4 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 5.2 seconds 5.7 seconds

911 Carrera S Manual transmission Tiptronic S Manual transmission Tiptronic S

(increased performance version) (increased performance version)
Top track speed 182 mph (293 km/h) 177 mph (285 km/h) 187 mph (300 km/h) 183 mph (294 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.7 seconds 5.1 seconds 4.5 seconds 4.9 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 4.9 seconds 5.4 seconds 4.7 seconds 5.2 seconds

911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4 Manual transmission Tiptronic S

Top track speed 174 mph (280 km/h) 171 mph (275 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 5.1 seconds 5.5 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 5.3 seconds 5.8 seconds

911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S Manual transmission Tiptronic S Manual transmission Tiptronic S
(increased performance version) (increased performance version)
Top track speed 179 mph (288 km/h) 174 mph (280 km/h) 184 mph (296 km/h) 180 mph (290 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.7 seconds 5.1 seconds 4.5 seconds 4.9 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 4.9 seconds 5.4 seconds 4.7 seconds 5.2 seconds

342 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dimensions

911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4,

911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S 911 Targa 4S

Length 175.6 in./4461 mm 175.6 in./4461 mm

Width 71.2 in./1808 mm 72.9 in./1852 mm

Height 51.6 in.1310 mm 51.6 in./1310 mm

Wheelbase 92.5 in./2350 mm 92.5 in./2350 mm

Ground clearance at maximum gross weight 911 Carrera: 4.1 in./104 mm 911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4: 4.1 in./103 mm

Turning circle 35.8 ft./10.9 m 35.8 ft./10.9 m

Vehicles with PASM

Height 51.2 in./1300 mm 51.2 in./1300 mm

Ground clearance at maximum gross weight 911 Carrera: 3.9 in./99 mm 911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4: 3.7 in./95 mm
911 Carrera S: 4.1 in./103 mm 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S: 3.9 in./98 mm

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 343

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine diagram at full power, engine type
M96/05

344 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine diagram at full power, engine type
M97/01

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 345

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Acceleration diagram for manual transmission,
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4 (values
have been determined at DIN empty weight and with a
50 % load without additional equipment)

346 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Acceleration diagram for manual transmission,
911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S
(values have been determined at DIN empty weight and
with a 50 % load without additional equipment)

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 347

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index
A B Break in hints ................................................ 19
ABS (antilock brake system) ........................... 75 Backrest Bulbs, replacing .......................................... 302
Warning light ........................................... 75 Adjustment ............................................. 39
Air distribution ............................................ 163 Release ................................................. 39 C
Air filter ...................................................... 252 Battery ....................................................... 295 Cabriolet .................................................... 204
Air-conditioning compressor ................. 163, 165 Care .................................................... 296 Canholder .................................................. 170
Airbag .......................................................... 51 Charging .............................................. 296 Capacities .................................................. 335
Function ................................................. 52 Putting vehicle into operation .................. 297 Car care ..................................................... 257
Warning light ..................................... 54, 63 Remote control ..................................... 299 Car telephone ............................................. 188
Alarm system ................................................ 30 Removing ............................................. 297 Car washes ................................................ 257
Alarm System ............................................. 188 Warning light ......................................... 106 Carpet ....................................................... 263
Alcantara ................................................... 263 Winter operation ................................... 296 Catalytic converter ...................................... 248
Antenna ............................................. 188, 258 Before driving off ..................................... 16, 17 Cautions ............................................ 232, 266
Antifreeze ................................................... 233 Belts .................................................... 48, 263 Central locking
Antilock brake system (ABS) ........................... 75 Height adjustment ................................... 50 Emergency operation .............................. 27
Warning light ........................................... 75 Tensioner ............................................... 48 Locking .................................................. 26
Ashtray ...................................................... 168 Warning light ........................................... 49 Central vents .............................................. 166
Assembly aids for wheel changes .................. 287 Blind .......................................................... 224 Central warning light .................................... 108
Audio operation ........................................... 186 Blower adjustment .............................. 164, 166 Changing wheels ......................................... 287
Auto-button, air conditioning ......................... 163 Brake light .......................................... 312, 313 Check engine
Automatic ................................................... 254 Brakes ....................................................... 240 Warning light ......................................... 107
Air conditioning system .......................... 163 Brake circuit division warning light ........... 241 Checking pressure ...................................... 288
Anti-glare mirrors .................................... 35 Brake pad warning light .......................... 109 Child restraint
Car washes .......................................... 258 Fluid ............................................ 240, 335 Anchorages ............................................ 62
Door locking ........................................... 25 Fluid warning light .................................. 241 Child restraint systems .................................. 57
Headlight adjustment ............................. 155 Pads ................................................ 19, 74 Chime ........................................................ 154
Speed control ......................... 96, 160, 161 Parking brake ......................................... 71 CHRONO stopwatch .................................... 120
Average consumption .......................... 111, 142 Roller brake tester ................................... 67 Cigarette lighter .......................................... 169
Average speed .................................... 111, 142 Test stand .............................................. 81 Circulating-air button .................................... 164
Clock ................................................. 104, 141

348 Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Clothes hook .............................................. 172 Driving hints .................................................. 15 Engine compartment
Clutch .................................................. 70, 192 Driving in winter ........................................... 197 Blower ................................................... 90
Comfort seat ................................................ 39 Driving performance ............................ 341, 342 Lid ............................................... 175, 176
Coming Home mode .................................... 154 Drop-center rim ........................................... 277 Lid warning light .................................... 175
Compact disc DVD navigation ............................................ 179 Light .................................................... 315
Player and Changer ............................... 186 DVD Navigation ................................... 177, 185 Engine compartment blower ......................... 101
Storage ............................................... 173 Dynamometer testing .................................... 66 Environment ................................................... 6
Compartment monitoring ............................... 30
Compressor ............................................... 179 E F
Convertible top ........................................... 204 Electrical system ......................................... 292 Filling pressure, tire ..................................... 334
Care .................................................... 258 Emergency flasher ...................................... 153 Fire extinguisher .......................................... 181
Coolant .............................................. 101, 233 Emergency operation Floor mats .................................................. 263
Temperature gauge ............................... 101 Central locking ........................................ 27 Fluids and fuels ........................................... 335
Warning light ......................................... 101 Lids ..................................................... 294 Fog lights ................................................... 154
Coolant level ............................................... 233 Sliding roof ........................................... 201 Footbrake .................................................... 72
Cooling system ................................... 101, 233 Tank flap .............................................. 244 Footwell lights ............................................. 315
Cruise control ..................................... 160, 162 Emergency service ...................................... 266 Four-wheel drive ...................................... 66, 67
Cupholder .................................................. 170 Emergency starting with jumper cables .......... 300 Fresh air intake ........................................... 166
Emission control system ........... 7, 107, 247, 248 Front lid ...................................................... 175
D Engine Fuel ....................................................... 5, 103
Dashboard ................................................... 84 Checking the oil level ............................. 136 Containers ....................................... 9, 245
Data bank ................................................... 326 Exhaust ................................................... 9 Economy ............................................. 242
Defrosting windows ............................... 36, 164 Number ............................................... 327 Evaporation control ............................... 249
Diagnostic socket ................................. 19, 293 Oil consumption .............................. 19, 235 Level gauge .......................................... 103
Dimensions ................................................ 343 Oil level ................................................ 236 Level warning light ................................. 103
Door ............................................................ 25 Oil level indicator ................................... 136 Recommendation .................................. 246
Guard lights .......................................... 316 Oil pressure .......................................... 105 Tank ............................................ 244, 245
Handles ................................................. 25 Oil temperature ....................................... 95 Function keys ................................................ 46
Locks ............................................ 25, 259 Oils .............................................. 235, 335 Fuses ......................................................... 293
Mirror .................................................... 34 Speeds .................................. 19, 341, 342
Mirror heating ......................................... 36 Starting ................................................. 89 G
Windows ........................... 25, 32, 204, 260 Stopping ................................................ 90 Garage door opener .................................... 182

Index 349

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Garage lift .................................................. 284 Interior mirror ......................................... 34, 35 Luggage compartment/engine compartment lid,
Glass rear hatch .......................................... 226 warning lights ............................................. 175
Glove compartment ..................................... 173 J Luggage rack ............................................. 229
Gong ...................................... 21, 88, 113, 154 Jumper cables ............................................ 300
Ground clearance ............................................ 9 M
K Maintenance ............................................... 232
H Keys ...................................................... 22, 23 Make-up mirror .............................................. 47
Handbrake ................................................... 71 Maximum permitted engine speeds ......... 19, 192
Hardtop ..................................................... 218 L Mirrors ................................................... 34, 35
Headlights .......................................... 156, 304 LATCH System .............................................. 61 Anti-glare ................................................ 35
Adjusting ...................................... 318, 319 Leather care ............................................... 262 Multi-functional steering wheel ........................ 46
Cleaning system ................... 157, 250, 335 License plate light ............................... 154, 314
Headlights beam adjustment ........................ 155 Lids ................................................... 175, 176 N
Heated rear window ....................................... 36 Emergency unlocking ............................ 294 Navigation .................................................. 185
Heater ....................................................... 163 Lifting/sliding roof ....................................... 200 Notes on
High beam Light Car care ............................................... 257
Indicator light ........................................ 100 Flasher ................................ 100, 154, 156 Maintenance ......................................... 232
Lever ................................................... 154 Low beam .................................... 154, 156 Number plate light ............................... 154, 314
Home mode ................................................ 154 Sensor for instrument illumination ............. 91
HomeLink ................................................... 182 Light alloy wheels O
Hoods ........................................................ 175 Inscription ............................................ 277 Octane rating .............................................. 246
Horn ................................................ 19, 26, 27 Light switch ........................................ 154, 156 Off delay .................................................... 154
Load switch-off ........................................... 293 Oil ............................................................. 235
I Loading information ..................................... 278 Checking level ...................................... 136
Ignition lock .................................................. 86 Locking ........................................................ 26 Consumption .......................................... 19
Immobilizer .................................................. 22 Conditions .............................................. 26 Level checks ........................................ 236
Indicator lights .............................................. 91 Lowering ...................................................... 63 Level indicator ...................................... 136
Instrument .................................................... 91 Luggage carrier .................................. 336, 337 Pressure .............................................. 105
Illumination ............................................. 97 Luggage compartment ................................ 177 Temperature ........................................... 95
Lights .................................................. 154 Lid ....................................................... 175 On-board computer ..................................... 110
Panel ............................................. 84, 143 Lid warning light .................................... 175 Basic settings ....................................... 139
Interior lights ................................................ 83 Light .................................................... 315 Language versions ................................ 141

350 Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 On-board literature .......................................... 1 R S
Orientation light ............................................. 83 Radiator fan .......................................... 90, 233 Safety belts .......................................... 48, 263
Outside temperatur indicator ........................ 104 Radio reception ........................................... 186 Height adjustment ................................... 50
Rain sensor ................................................ 158 Tensioner ............................................... 48
P Range on remaining fuel ....................... 111, 142 Warning light ........................................... 49
Paint Reading light ......................................... 83, 317 Safety compliance sticker ............................ 326
Care .................................................... 257 Rear fog light .............................................. 154 Sealing set ................................................. 281
Data .................................................... 327 Rear lid ...................................................... 175 Seals ......................................................... 262
ParkAssistant ............................................... 64 Rear seat backrests ...................................... 44 Seat
Parking ...................................................... 197 Rear spoiler .................................................. 68 Adjustment ............................................. 39
Parking aids .................................................. 64 Rear view mirrors .................................... 34, 35 Heating .................................................. 43
Mirrors ................................................... 65 Rear window ............................................... 226 Memory ................................................. 41
Parking brake ............................................... 71 Rear window defogger ................................... 36 Selector lever ............................................. 193
Warning light ........................................... 71 Rear window wiper ...................................... 158 selector lever position indicator .................... 194
Parking light ....................................... 154, 156 Recycling ....................................................... 7 Selector lever position indicator .................... 102
Particle filter ............................................... 252 Reduced driving program, Tiptronic ............... 198 Shifting gear ............................................... 192
Passenger compartment monitoring ............... 30 Relays ........................................................ 292 Side marker light ................................. 154, 311
Plastic parts ............................................... 262 Release button ............................................ 193 Side vents .................................................. 166
Platform lift ................................................. 284 Remote control ............................................. 23 Sliding glass roof ......................................... 225
Porsche Active Suspension Management Replacement key ........................................... 22 Sliding roof ................................................. 200
(PASM) ......................................................... 82 Replacing bulbs ........................................... 302 Snow chains ............................................... 275
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake ................... 8 Replacing wiper blades ................................ 255 Snow tires .................................................. 274
Porsche Communication Management (PCM) . 185 Rims Socket ....................................................... 292
Porsche Stability System (PSM) ...................... 79 Diameter .............................................. 277 Spacers ..................................... 286, 288, 290
Information light ...................................... 81 Rim width ............................................. 277 Spare key ............................................... 22, 23
Power measurement ..................................... 66 Roller blind ................................................. 224 Speed code letter ........................................ 276
Power measurements .................................. 232 Rollover Protection System ............................ 63 Speed control ............................... 96, 160, 162
Power steering fluid level ...................... 251, 335 Roof Transport System ................ 229, 336, 337 Speed limit ......................................... 113, 276
Power windows ............................... 25, 32, 204 Running in ..................................................... 19 Speedometer ............................................... 99
Practical tips ............................................... 266 Spoiler ......................................................... 68
Sport Chrono Package
CHRONO stopwatch .............................. 120

Index 351

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sport mode ............................................ 78 Tiptronic .................................................... 193 V
Sport mode ............................................ 78, 82 Indicator .............................................. 102 Valves ........................................................ 272
Sport tires ...................................................... 8 Tire pressure Vanity mirror ................................................. 47
Sports seat .................................................. 39 Compressor ......................................... 179 Vehicle
Stability management system ......................... 79 Tire Pressure Monitoring .............................. 127 Care .................................................... 257
Starting ........................................................ 87 Tires ..................................... 19, 267, 330, 332 Data .................................................... 326
Starting engine ............................................. 89 Care .................................................... 267 Identification label ................................. 326
Steering lock ................................................ 86 Checking pressure ................................ 288 Identification number ............................. 326
Steering wheel Inscription ............................................ 276 Putting into operation ............................ 297
Adjustment ............................................. 45 Loading information .............................. 278 Washing ............................................... 257
Function keys ......................................... 46 Pressure ...................................... 268, 334 Ventilation .................................................. 163
Lock ...................................................... 88 Pressure monitoring .............................. 127 Vents ................................................. 163, 166
Rocker switches ................................... 193 Pressure plate ...................................... 327 Viscosity, engine oil ..................................... 238
Stopping engine ............................................ 90 Sealant ........................................ 179, 281
Stopwatch .................................................. 120 Sidewall ............................................... 276 W
Storage options .......................................... 172 Size ..................................................... 276 Warning lights and messages ....................... 143
Storing your Porsche ................................... 263 Tool kit ....................................................... 179 Washer
Sun visors .................................................... 47 Tools ................................................. 178, 179 Fluid ............................................ 250, 335
Tool kit ................................................. 179 Lever ................................................... 157
T Tow-starting ................................................ 198 Washing ..................................................... 257
Tachometer ................................................ 100 Towing ....................................... 198, 321, 322 Weights .............................................. 336, 337
Tank .................................................. 245, 335 Towing lug .................................................. 179 Welcome Home Function .............................. 154
Ventilation system ................................. 249 Tracks ............................................... 330, 332 Wheel ................... 19, 261, 267, 276, 330, 332
Targa ......................................................... 224 Transmission ...................................... 192, 329 Bolts .................................................... 285
Technical data ............................................. 328 Fluid ............................................ 253, 335 Care .................................................... 267
Telephone .................................................. 188 Trunk entrapment ........................................ 180 Changing ............................................. 281
Temperature setting .................................... 163 Turn signals ........................................ 100, 156 Checking pressure ................................ 288
Temperature, outside indicator ..................... 104 Inscription ............................................ 276
Test stand, measurements ............................. 81 U Loading information .............................. 278
Theft protection ............................................ 21 Undercoating ...................................... 247, 261 Securing wheel bolts ............................... 22
Tightening torque for wheel bolts .................. 288 Security wheel bolts .............................. 179
Tire pressure ................................ 268, 334

352 Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire pressure plate ................................ 327
Tire sealant .......................................... 281
Windows ...................................... 32, 204, 260
Washer nozzles ..................................... 157
Washer system ..................... 157, 250, 335
Windshield wiper/washer lever ...................... 157
Windshield wipers ................................ 157, 255
Replacing ............................................. 255
Windstop .................................................... 214
Winter operation
Battery ................................................ 296
Coolant ................................................ 233
Engine oil ............................................. 235
Jumper cables ...................................... 300
Locks .................................................. 259
Seals ................................................... 262
Snow chains ......................................... 275
Tires .................................... 274, 330, 332
Washer fluid .......................................... 250
Wiper blades ........................................ 255
Wiper
Blades ................................................. 255
Rear .................................................... 158

Index 353

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine